Revelation 18:23 — Word Study

Greek	English	Parsing
καὶ	And	Conjunction
φῶς	[the] light	Noun, nominative, singular
λύχνου	of lamp	Noun, genitive, singular
οὐ	certainly	Particle, negative
μὴ	not	Particle, negative
φάνῃ	may shine	Verb, second aorist, passive
ἐν	in	Preposition
σοὶ	you	Personal pronoun, second person, dative
ἔτι,	any longer,	Adverb
καὶ	and	Conjunction
φωνὴ	[the] voice	Noun, nominative, singular
νυμφίου	of a bridegroom	Noun, genitive, singular
καὶ	and	Conjunction
νύμφης	a bride	Noun, genitive, singular
οὐ	certainly	Particle, negative
μὴ	not	Particle, negative
ἀκουσθῇ	may be heard	Verb, aorist, passive
ἐν	in	Preposition
σοὶ	you	Personal pronoun, second person, dative
ἔτι,	any longer,	Adverb
ὅτι	for	Conjunction
οἱ	the	Article, nominative, plural
ἔμποροί	merchants	Noun, nominative, plural
σου	of you	Personal pronoun, second person, genitive
ἦσαν	were	Verb, imperfect, active
οἱ	the	Article, nominative, plural
μεγιστᾶνες	great ones	Noun, nominative, plural
τῆς	of the	Article, genitive, singular
γῆς,	earth,	Noun, genitive, singular
ὅτι	because	Conjunction
ἐν	by	Preposition
τῇ	the	Article, dative, singular
φαρμακείᾳ	sorcery	Noun, dative, singular
σου	of you	Personal pronoun, second person, genitive
ἐπλανήθησαν	were deceived	Verb, aorist, passive
πάντα	all	Adjective, nominative, plural
τὰ	the	Article, nominative, plural
ἔθνη.	nations.	Noun, nominative, plural

	Reference	Text (BSB)
1	Revelation 22:5	There will be no more night in the city, and they will have no need for the light of a lamp or of the sun. For the Lord God will shine on them, and they will reign forever and ever.
2	Job 21:17	How often is the lamp of the wicked put out? Does disaster come upon them? Does God, in His anger, apportion destruction?
3	Proverbs 4:18–19	The path of the righteous is like the first gleam of dawn, shining brighter and brighter until midday.
4	Proverbs 24:20	For the evil man has no future; the lamp of the wicked will be extinguished.
5	Revelation 18:22	And the sound of harpists and musicians, of flute players and trumpeters, will never ring out in you again. Nor will any craftsmen of any trade be found in you again, nor the sound of a millstone be heard in you again.

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίAnd8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

φῶςphōs [the] light G5457 Noun · nominative · singular · neuter ¶

72× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Light refers to any kind of luminousness, natural or artificial, and is used in the Bible to describe the light of the sun or a lamp. In Matthew 17:2 and John 11:9-10, it describes Jesus shining like the sun.

Amplified meaning

radiance, illumination

Tyndale gloss

light

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

φῶς (i.e., *phos*) means 'light' and can refer to both natural and artificial sources. It is used in various contexts, including physical light from the sun or lamps, as well as metaphorical light representing divine truth or spiritual illumination. The New Testament employs it to describe God's presence, the glory of Christ, and the moral clarity of believers. Notably, it appears in verses like Matthew 17:2 and 2 Corinthians 4:6.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — φῶς, φέγγος, φωστήρ, λύχνος, λαμπάς from a scan

Ati these words are rendered, some occasionally, some always, in our Version, by ‘light’; thus, dos at Matt. iv. 16; Rom. xiii. 12, and often; φέγγος at Matt. xxiv. 29; Mark xiii. 24; Luke xi. 33 (it does not occur again) ; φωστήρ at Phil. ii. 15 ; Rev. xxi. 11 (where only it occurs) ; λύχνος at Matt. vi. 22; John v. 35; 2 Pet.i. 19, and elsewhere; though this often by ‘ candle’ (Matt. v. 15; Rev. Xxli. 5); and λαμπὰς at Acts xx. 8, though elsewhere rendered ‘lamp’ (Matt. xxv. 1; Rev. vill. 10), and ‘ torch’ (John xviii. 3). The old grammarians distinguish between φῶς and φέγγος (which are but different forms of one and the same word), that φῶς is the light of the sun or of the day, φέγγος the light or lustre of the moon. The Attic writers, to whom this distinction must belong, if to any, themselves only imperfectly observe it. Thus, in Sophocles φέγγος is three or four times ascribed…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φῶς (Att.. contr. from φάος; < φάω), gen., φωτός, τό,

[in LXX chiefly for אוֹר ;]

light (opp. to τὸ σκότος, ἡ σκοτία): Mt 17:2, 5, Jo 11:9, 10, II Co 4:6; ἡλίου, Re 22:5; of a lamp, Lk 8:16 11:33, Jo 5:35, Re 18:23; of a supernatural heavenly light, Ac 9:3 12:7 22:6, 9, 11 26:13; hence, ἄγγελος φωτός, II Co 11:14; ὁ κλήρος τ. ἁγίων ἐν τ. φ., Col 1:12; of the divine glory, Re 21:24; by meton., of that which gives light: of fire, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

φῶς, φωτός. τό, (contr. fr. φάος, fr. φάω to shine), fr. Hom. (who [as well as Pind.] uses the form φάος) down, Hebr. 18, light (opp. to τὸ σκότος, ἡ σκοτία) ; 1. prop. a. univ.: ὁ θεὸς ὁ εἰπὼν ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψαι, 3 Co. iv. 6 (Gen. i. 3); λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς, Mt. xvii. 2; νεφέλη φωτός [Grsb. txt.] i. e. consisting of light, i. q. φωτεινή in RLT Tr WH, Mt. xvii. 5; τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου, of the sun, Jn. xi. 9; τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ, the light (i.e. illumining power) is not in him, consequently he does not see or distinguish the things about him, Jn. xi. 10; the light emitted bya lamp, Lk. viii. 16; [xi.33L Tr txt. WH]. a heavenly light, such as surrounds angels when they appear on earth: hence ἄγγελος φωτός, 2 Co. xi. 14, and illumines the place where they appear, Acts xii. 7; a light of this kind shone around Paul when he was converted to Christ, Acts xxii. 6, [9], 11[W. 371 (848)]; with…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

φῶς. For ‘‘light” opposed to “" darkness,” see P Leid Wi. 4 (ii/iii a.p.) (=I1. p. 101) φωτὸς καὶ σκότους. In the imprecatory curse Sy// 891 (= ὃ 1240)" the prayer is uttered that the victim shall enjoy μηδὲ οἴκου, μὴ φωτός, μὴ χρήσεως, μηδὲ κτήσεως. The plur. is applied to ‘‘ windowlights” in P Lond 1179°* (ii/A.p.) (=III. p. 146) φῶτα θυρίδων, and to “‘torches,” as in Ac 167%, in BGU III. 909} (A.D. 359) ἐπελθόντες. . . TH ἡμετέρᾳ οἰκίᾳ καὶ φῶτα ἐπενεγκ[όν]τες ἐνέπρησαν αὐτὴν ἐκ θεματίου. Cf. 20. IV. 120 110 (A.D. 2) where φωτί takes the place οἵ πυρί or φλογί - εὕρωμεν τὰς θύρας τοῦ ἱεροῦ Σαράπειδος θεοῦ μεγίστου ὑφημένας (1 ὑφημμένας) φωτί. This last passage may illustrate Mk 1454 θερμαινόμενος πρὸς τὸ φῶς, where we should translate with the AV ‘‘warmed himself at the ». see C. H. Turner Comm. ad ἢ. in Gore’s New Commentary. The subst. is applied metaph. to those who impart light…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φῶς (phōs) — light.

φῶς,

contraction for φάος, light (which see). φῴς, ἡ, plural φῷδες, contraction from φωΐς (which see).

Strong's Greek Dictionary

φῶς

phos

from an obsolete phao (to shine or make manifest, especially by rays;

compare 5316, 5346); luminousness (in the widest application, natural

or artificial, abstract or concrete, literal or figurative):--fire,

light.

see GREEK for 5316

see GREEK for 5346

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φῶς, φωτός, τό

n.n.

light, a source of light

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

φῶς phōs 73x

light, Mt. 17:2; 2 Cor. 4:6; daylight, broad day, Mt. 10:27; Lk. 12:3; radiance, blaze of light, Mt. 4:16; Acts 9:3; 12:7; an instrument or means of light, a light, Mt. 6:23; Acts 16:29; a fire, Mk. 14:54; Lk. 22:56; from the Hebrew, the light of God’s presence, 2 Cor. 11:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

lit ('or, ma'or; phos; many other words):

1. Origin of Light

2. A Comprehensive Term

(1) Natural Light

(2) Artificial Light

(3) Miraculous Light

(4) Mental, Moral, Spiritual Light

3. An Attribute of Holiness

(1) God

(2) Christ

(3) Christians

(4) The Church

4. Symbolism

5. Expressive Terms

1. Origin of Light:

The creation of light was the initial step in the creation of life. "Let there be light" (Ge 1:3) was the first word of God spoken after His creative Spirit "moved" upon the primary material out of which He created the heavens and the earth, and which lay, until the utterance of that word, in the chaos of darkness and desolation. Something akin, possibly, to the all-pervasive electro-magnetic activity of the aurora borealis penetrated the chaotic night of the world. The ultimate focusing of light (on the 4th day of creation,

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Light

The offspring of the divine command (Gen. 1:3). “All the more joyous emotions of the mind, all the pleasing sensations of the frame, all the happy hours of domestic intercourse were habitually described among the Hebrews under imagery derived from light” (1 Kings 11:36; Isa. 58:8; Esther 8:16; Ps. 97:11). Light came also naturally to typify true religion and the felicity it imparts (Ps. 119:105; Isa. 8:20; Matt. 4:16, etc.), and the glorious inheritance…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

One of the most wonderful, cheering, and useful of all the works of God; called into being on the first of the six days of creation, by his voice: "Let there be light;" and there was light. No object better illustrates whatever is pure, glorious, spiritual, joyful, and beneficent. Hence the beauty and force of the expressions, "God is light," 1Jo 1:5, and "the Father of lights," Jas 1:17; Christ is the "Sun of righteousness," and "the light of the world," Joh 1:9 8:12. So also the word of God is "a light," Ps 119:105; truth and Christians are lights, Joh 3:19 12:36; prosperity is "light," Es 8:16; and heaven is full of…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Created Ge 1:3-5; Isa 45:7; 2Co 4:6

→ Miraculous Mt 17:2; Ac 9:3

→ FIGURATIVE AND SYMBOLICAL 1Ki 11:36; Ps 27:1; 119:105,130; Pr 6:23; Ec 2:13; Isa 8:20; 49:6; 58:8; 60:19,20; Mt 4:16; 5:14,16; Lu 2:32; 11:34; 16:8;

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

96%light

light96% · 69×lights3% · 2×other renderings1% · 1×

72 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial36%subject25%object21%predicate18%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 72 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐνεἰμίI am, existπρός

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐφίστημιI stand by, am uλύχνοςa lamp

υἱόςa son, descendent

ἵναin order that, sσύ

ἐγώ

περιλάμπωI shine around

περιαστράπτωI flash around like

αὐτόςοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea

φῶς[the] light72×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

κόσμοςthe world, univeἐνἀληθινόςtrue, real, genu

εἰμίI am, exist

καίand, even, also,γάρforὁArticle the

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theὅςἀτενίζωI direct my gaze

ἐν

ὁArticle theσύκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

ἵναin order that, so th

πᾶςall, the whole, μήNegφανερόωI make clear, vi

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceφῶς · 72× in the New Testament

John Acts Matthew 1 John Luke Ephesians Revelation 2 Corinthians Romans 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy

Across the New Testament15 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

κόσμοςthe world, universe×σκότοςdarkness×υἱόςa son, descendent×λάμπωI shine×φῶςlight, a source of light×σκοτίαdarkness×ἔθνοςa race, people, the Gentiles×μαρτυρέωI witness, testify×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אוֹרlight64%H216 · 66 verses

Counted over the 102 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.27c. AD 75–95

ταύτης δʼ ὑπʼ ὄψιν οὐκ ἐρχομένης, ἀλλὰ βαθεῖ μὲν κρυπτομένης σκότει, πνεύματος δʼ αὐτὴν ἄνωθεν ἐπιθέοντος, γενέσθαι φῶς ἐκέλευσεν ὁ θεός.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.4c. AD 100

τότε ῥαγήσεται πρώϊμον τὸ φῶς σου, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτιά σου ταχέως ἀνατελεῖ, καὶ προπορεύσεται ἔμπροσθέν σου ἡ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ ἡ δόξα τοῦ θεοῦ περιστελεῖ σε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 5th c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Fay. 213 descr.Euhemeria (Arsinoites)3 BC

Ἀπολλώνιος Ὥρῳ καὶ … φωτι γεωργοῖς χαίρειν· ἀπέχω παρʼ ὑμῶν τὰ ἐκφόρια τοῦ ὀγδόου καὶ εἰκοστοῦ ἔτους ἀφʼ ὧν

BGU 4 1201Busiris (Herakleopolites)AD 2

λειτουργίας καὶ θυσίας τῶν θεῶν εὕρομεν τὰς θύρας τοῦ ἱεροῦ Σαράπειδος θεοῦ μεγίστου ὑφημμένας φωτί. καὶ ἡμῶν ἀνακραξάντων εἰς τὴν κώμην πρὸς βοήθειαν κατεπήδησεν ὁ γυμνασίαρχος τῆς κώμης καὶ

P.Mil.Vogl. 2 99Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 119

ἣν ἐξεν … ρ … αὐτῶν α … … … ὧν κεκλήρωνται θύρας καὶ φῶτα θυρίδων τρία , τὸν δὲ Ὧρον Τεσενούφεως ἑαυτῶι ἀνοίγειν … υ κεκλη

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

λύχνουluchnos of lamp G3088 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine ¶

14× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A lamp is a portable light source, used in the Bible to symbolize spiritual guidance, as seen in Matthew 5:15 and Luke 11:36.

Tyndale gloss

lamp

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λύχνος (luchnos) refers to a portable lamp or light source, often placed on a stand. It appears in various New Testament contexts, such as in Matthew 5:15 and John 5:35, where it can symbolize enlightenment or guidance. The term is also used metaphorically for the eye and spiritual readiness. Some entries note its use in the Septuagint for the Hebrew word for lamp.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — φῶς, φέγγος, φωστήρ, λύχνος, λαμπάς from a scan

Ati these words are rendered, some occasionally, some always, in our Version, by ‘light’; thus, dos at Matt. iv. 16; Rom. xiii. 12, and often; φέγγος at Matt. xxiv. 29; Mark xiii. 24; Luke xi. 33 (it does not occur again) ; φωστήρ at Phil. ii. 15 ; Rev. xxi. 11 (where only it occurs) ; λύχνος at Matt. vi. 22; John v. 35; 2 Pet.i. 19, and elsewhere; though this often by ‘ candle’ (Matt. v. 15; Rev. Xxli. 5); and λαμπὰς at Acts xx. 8, though elsewhere rendered ‘lamp’ (Matt. xxv. 1; Rev. vill. 10), and ‘ torch’ (John xviii. 3). The old grammarians distinguish between φῶς and φέγγος (which are but different forms of one and the same word), that φῶς is the light of the sun or of the day, φέγγος the light or lustre of the moon. The Attic writers, to whom this distinction must belong, if to any, themselves only imperfectly observe it. Thus, in Sophocles φέγγος is three or four times ascribed…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λύχνος, -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX for נֵר (Ex 25:36 (37), al.);]

a lamp (portable, and usually set on a stand, λυχνία): Mt 5:15, Lk 11:36; ἔρχεται ὁ λ., Mk 4:21; λ. ἅπτειν, Lk 8:16 11:33 15:8; φῶς λύχνου, Re 18:23; id. opp. to φ. ἡλίου, Re 22:5; metaph., of the eye, Mt 6:22, Lk 11:34; of John the Baptist, Jo 5:35; of the Lamb, Re 21:23; of prophecy…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λύχνος, του, 6, Sept. for Ἢ), [fr. Hom. down]; a lamp, candle [?], that is placed on a stand or candlestick (Lat. candelabrum), [ οἴ. Trench, N. T. Syn. § xlvi.; Becker, Charicles, Se. ix. (Eng. trans. p- 156 n.5)]: Mt. v. 15; Mk. iv. 21; [Lk. xi. 36]; xii. 35; Rev. xxii. 5; φῶς λύχνου, Rev. xviii. 23; opp. to φῶς ἡλίου, xxii. 5 LT Tr WH; ἅπτειν λύχνον ((Lk. viii. 16; xi. 33; xv. 8], see ἅπτω, 1). Toa“lamp” are likened — the eye, 6 λύχνος τοῦ σώματος, i. 6. which shows the body which way to move and turn, Mt. vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34; the prophecies of the O. T., inasmuch as they afforded at least some knowledge relative to the glorious return of Jesus from heaven down even to the time when by the Holy Spirit that same light, like the day and the day-star, shone upon the hearts of men, the light by which the prophets themselves had been enlightened and which was necessary to the full…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λύχνος. P Tebt I. 8813 (b.c. 115-4) εἴς τε τὰς θυσίας καὶ λύχνων ἁφῶν (1. adds), ‘for sacrifices and the lighting of lamps,” P Oxy XII. 1453}8 (B.C. 30-29) τὸ καθῆκον ἔλαιον εἰς τοὺς | καθ᾽ ἡμέραν λύχνους καομένους ἐν τοῖς σημαινομένοις ἱεροῖς, ‘*the proper oil for the daily lamps burning in the temples signified ” (Edd.), P Lond 193 verso * (ii/a.p.) (=II. p. 246) λύχνον διφανιν(όν), “ἃ lamp with a double light ’’ | (Ed.), 2. 117774 (A.D. 113) (= III. p. 183) ἐλαίου κα[ζύ]σεως | Ad ts διὰ ds ἐ é B "22 Δ (AEDs the clause—aAX’ ἵνα λυτρώσωμαι τὴν ψυχήν μου ἐκ θανάτου. IS OC OCS CAL ae be sae a) (= Selections, p. 76) ἄρας τὸν λύχνον μου ἀνέβη εἰς τὴν λύχνον καθαρόν, καινόν, ἔπιθες ἐπὶ τὸν λύχνον τὸν πόδα ἱπποποταμίου (1. --μου). For λυχναψία, an Egyptian lamp-festival, cf. P Amh II. 70110 (between A.D. 114 and 117) (= Chres¢. I. p. 776), and for λυχνάπτης (—Tos) cf. P Oxy XII. 1453* (B.C.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λύχνος (luchnos) — lamp.

λύχνος, ὁ,

plural λύχνοι [Refs 7th c.BC+]. (fragment λυκ-sno-, compare Λύκη):—portable light, lamp, χρύσεος λ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; λύχνα καίειν, ἀνάπτειν, light lamps, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λύχνους ἅπτειν to have an illumination, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λ. ἀπεσβήκει had been put out, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; περὶ λύχνων ἁφάς about lamp-lighting time, i. e. towards nightfall, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάννυχος λ. παρακαίεται lamps are kept burning all night, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔλαιον ἡμῖν οὐκ ἔνεστ᾽ ἐν τῷ λύχνῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare κεράτινος.

2. in plural, οἱ λύχνοι or τὰ λύχνα the lamp-market, οὑκ τῶν λ. [Refs]

II. a fish, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; cf. Latin lucerna, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

λύχνος

luchnos

from the base of 3022; a portable lamp or other illuminator (literally

or figuratively):--candle, light.

see GREEK for 3022

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λύχνος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a lamp

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λύχνος lychnos 14x

a light, lamp, candle, etc., Mt. 5:15; Mk. 4:21; met. a lamp, as a figure of a distinguished teacher, Jn. 5:35

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

λύχνος λύχνος, ὁ, pl. λύχνοι and λύχνα: — a portable light, a lamp, carried in the hand or set on a lamp-stand (λυχνίον), Od., Hdt., attic; περὶ λύχνων ἁφάς about lamplighting time, Hdt.

in pl. the lamp-market, Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Lamp

(1.) That part of the candle-sticks of the tabernacle and the temple which bore the light (Ex. 25:37; 1 Kings 7:49; 2 Chr. 4:20; 13:11; Zech. 4:2). Their form is not described. Olive oil was generally burned in them (Ex. 27:20).

(2.) A torch carried by the soliders of Gideon (Judg. 7:16, 20). (R.V., “torches.”)

(3.) Domestic lamps (A.V., “candles”) were in common use among the Hebrews (Matt. 5:15; Mark 4:21, etc.).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

That part of the golden candlestick belonging to the tabernacle which bore the light; also of each of the ten candlesticks placed by Solomon in the temple before the holy of holies. (Exodus 25:37; 1 Kings 7:49; 2 Chronicles 4:20; 13:11; Zechariah 4:2) The lamps were lighted every evening and cleansed every morning. (Exodus 30:7,8) A torch or flambeau, such as was carried by the soldiers of Gideon. (Judges 7:16,20) comp. Judg 15:4 The use in marriage processions of lamps fed with oil is alluded to in the parable of…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The lamps of the ancients, sometimes called "candles" in our Bible, were cups and vessels of many convenient and graceful shapes; and might be carried in the hand, or set upon a stand. See CANDLESTICK. The lamp was fed with vegetable oils, tallow, wax, etc., and was kept burning all night. The poorest families, in some parts of the East, still regard this as essential to health and comfort. A darkened house therefore forcibly told of the extinction of its former occupants, Job 18:5,6 Pr 13:9 20:20 Jer 25:10,11; while a constant light was significant of prosperity and perpetuity, 2Sa 21:17 1Ki 11:36

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Miraculously appeared at Abraham's sacrifice Ge 15:17

→ For the tabernacle Ex 25

→ Kept burning at night in the tabernacle and cared for by priest Ex 27:20,21; Le 24:2-4

→ FIGURATIVE Job 18:6; Ps 119:105; Pr 13:9; 20:20; Isa 62:1; Jer 25:10; Zep 1:12; Pr 13:9; 20:20; Isa 62:1;

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

79%lamp

lamp79% · 11×a lamp14% · 2×lamps7% · 1×

14 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject50%object43%predicate7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 14 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,ἔρχομαιI come, goὅτανwhen, whensoever

φῶςlight, a source of l

καίand, even, also,χρείαneed, necessity,

καίωI ignite, light, bur

οὐδέNeg

δέbut, on the other ha

οὐδείςno one, none, no

οὐδείςno one, none, nothin

λύχνοςof lamp14×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

σῶμαbody, fleshἀστραπήa flash of lightκαίωI ignite, light,

καίand, even, also, nam

τίθημιI put, placeσαρόωI sweepφῶςlight, a source

ἅπτωI kindle, light

καλύπτωI veil, hide, coεἰς

ἵναin order that, so th

ὑπό

καίωI ignite, light, bur

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλύχνος · 14× in the New Testament

Luke Revelation Matthew 2 Peter John Mark

Across the New Testament6 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

καίωI ignite, light, burn×ἅπτωI kindle, light×φῶςlight, a source of light×σῶμαbody, flesh×οὐδείςno one, none, nothing×ὡςas, like as, how, while, so that×φαίνωI shine, appear, seem×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

נֵרlamp H5216b נִיר lamp86%H5216 · 25 verses

Counted over the 29 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Didache

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Giants 33c. AD 40

ὄντως γὰρ ὁ ἀληθινὸς οὗτός ἐστιν, ὃν καὶ τῶν παλαιῶν λύχνον τις μεσημβρίας ἁψάμενος πρὸς τοὺς πυνθανομένους ἄνθρωπον ἔφη ζητεῖν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.146c. AD 75–95

λύχνοι δʼ ἐπιφέρονται αὐταῖς ἑπτὰ κατὰ μίαν τῶν πλανητῶν τὸν ἀριθμὸν μεμιμημένοι, ὁρῶσι δὲ εἴς τε τὴν ἀνατολὴν καὶ τὴν μεσημβρίαν λοξῶς αὐτῆς κειμένης.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 21.2c. AD 96

λέγει γάρ που: Πνεῦμα κυρίου λύχνος ἐρευνῶν τὰ ταμιεῖα τῆς γαστρός:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD

SB 12 10799AD 14–AD 41

ἡμέρας. θεῶν θελόντων, ἐν ταῖς τρισὶ ἡμέραις ἐσόμεθα ἐν πλοίωι. τὸ παιδίον ἐπέμβλεψον ὡς λύχνον, ἐπεὶ λίαν ἀγωνιῶ περὶ ὑμῶν. ἐὰν ὁ τοῦ Ἀπόλλωνος ἔλθῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς περὶ τοῦ

P.Hamb. 3 223AD 113

χαλκώματα δύο , ὧν ἓν ἁδρὸν καὶ ἄλλο μικρόν, καὶ ε … τέσσαρες καὶ λύχνον χαλκοῦν … ἀποσπάθιν καὶ ἔσοπτρον γυναικεῖον. ἔτους ιζ Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Νέρουα Τραιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ

P.Sarap. 72 RoHermopolitesAD 128

rColumn 1 … … … … … ρυς … … ἴδιοι Λύχνος … … ρις καὶ … … Μαγκλη … … υ … ζ

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

οὐou certainly G3756 Particle · negative ¶

1,622× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This is a strong 'no', used to deny something completely. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 13:29 and John 1:21. It is a negative answer to a question.

Tyndale gloss

no

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὐ (transliterated as ou) is a primary negative particle meaning 'not' or 'no.' It is used to negate verbs or statements, often appearing in various forms depending on the following sound. In the New Testament, it frequently serves to deny facts and is distinct from another negative particle, μή (transliterated as mē), which is used for prohibitions or wishes.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Ac 2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., § 409; M, Pr., 44, 244),

[in LXX for לֹא, אַיִן, אֵין;]

neg. particle,

not, no, used generally c. indic. and for a denial of fact (cf . μή);

absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mt 13:29, Jo 1:21 21:5; οὒ οὔ, Mt 5:37, Ja 5:12.

Most freq. negativing a verb or other word, Mt 1:25 10:26, 38, Mk 3:25 9:37, Jo 8:29, Ac 7:5, Ro 1:16, Phl 3:3, al.; in…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a smooth breathing, and ody before an aspirated vowel ; but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mrg. have adopted οὐχ ἰδού, Acts ii. 7; LT οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, Acts iii. 6] in cod. x [alsoC*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 ἔβαν. iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviiil. 11, 26]); cf. W. $5, 14d. 14; Β. τ; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, pp: 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. pp: Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ου to make the voyage” (Edd.), and P Amh II. 78?! (a.p. 184) τοιαύτης ο[ὖ]ν αὐθαδίας ἐν αὐτῷ οὔσης οὐ δυνάμενος [ἐν]καρτερεῖν ἐπιδίδωμι, ‘“ his audacity having reached this pitch I can endure no longer and present this petition.” See further Proleg. p. 231 f. In support of the translation ‘‘ I determined not to know” in 1 Cor 2, we may cite P Par 2657 (B.c. 163) (= UPZi. Ρ-. 248) οὐκ ἐκρίναμεν καταχωρῆσαι, ‘we determined not to record,” P Tebt I. 124° (c. B.c. 118) οὐκ (ἐκδρίναμεν ἐξαρ[ιθ]μεῖ[σθαι, “we determined not to be counted,” and the classical formula in P Hamb I. 27° (B.c. 250 (249)) οὐκ ἔφη εἰδέναι, ‘he said that he did not know.” The origin of the double negative οὐ μή is fully discussed by Moulton Pro/eg. p. 187 ff. When we pass to its actual occurrences in the NT, we find that these for the most part are found in passages derived from the OT and in the Sayings of our Lord…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὐ (ou) — no.

οὐ,

the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. as the negative of single words,

II. as the negative of the sentence.

I. οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε.. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

οὐ

ou

ouk ook, and (before an aspirate)

ouch ookh

a primary word; the absolute negative (compare 3361) adverb; no or

not:--+ long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, +

nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but. See also

3364, 3372.

see GREEK for 3361

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὐ

Neg.prt.

no, not

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὐ ou 1x

negative adverb, originally the gen. of ὅς, spelled οὐκ if followed by a word beginning with a vowel and a smooth breathing, οὐχ if followed by a vowel and rough breathing, not, no, Mt. 5:37; 12:43; 23:37; for the peculiarities of its usage (especially as distinct from μή) consult a grammar

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

82%not

not82% · 1383×certainly6% · 96×surely4% · 70×no longer3% · 50×no2% · 39×other renderings3% · 51×

1,689 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial82%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,622 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

εἰμίI am, existἐγώαὐτός

ὅς

ἐγώθερίζωI reap, gatherδέbut, on the othe

ὅτιthat, since, because

σύαὐτόςἐγώ

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakἐνἐπί

σύ

λέγωI say, speakγάρforὅς

οὐcertainly1622×

what comes after →

εἰμίI am, exist

ἐκὁArticle theἐγώ

μήNeg

παρέρχομαιI pass byεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inπίνωI drink, imbibe

οἶδαI know, remember

ὅτιthat, since, becὁArticle theτίςIrg

γάρfor

εἰμίI am, existθέλωI will, wish, deὁArticle the

δύναμαιI am powerful, am ab

ἔρχομαιI come, goσῴζωI save, healὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὐ · 1,622× in the New Testament

John Matthew Luke 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts 2 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews 1 John Galatians

8 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

οἶδαI know, remember×δύναμαιI am powerful, am able×οὐδέNeg×μόνοςalone, but, only×χρείαneed, necessity, business×ἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted, lawful, possible×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 6c. AD 40

ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Grenf. 1 17137 BC

δὲ γενόμεναι κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον κληρονομήσασαι ταξάμεναι τὰ καθήκοντα τέλη θεᾶι Βερενίκηι κυριεύομεν. ὅθεν οὐκ ἀποδιδόντων τὰ ἡμέτερα ἐπεδώκαμεν ἐν τῶι λ ἔτει προσανγελίαν Ἡρακλείδει γενομένωι ἀρχιφυλακίτηι τοῦ Παθυρίτου

C.Erbstreit16Diospolis Magna (Theben)135 BC

ι ἀρουρῶν πρόκτησιν … ένου αὐτὸν ἐν συνεδρίωι καὶ συγχώρησιν … ειν, ἐν ἧι οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ὁ πατήρ. ὅθεν καταβεβραβευμένοι … ήρου συνεριου ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι γράψαι, οἷς

P.Adl. 2Pathyris125 BC

ὠνῆς ἐν πίστει διὰ τῶν περὶ τὸν Πανεβχοῦνιν ἐκτελειωθεῖσαν τῶι … ἔτει ἀντὶ ὀφειλημάτων, οὐκ ἐπελευσομένους τὸν Πανερέα καὶ τὴν Σενενοῦπιν περὶ ὀφειλημάτων μηδὲ περὶ ἄλλου μηδενός. ταῦτα δὲ

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

μὴmē not G3361 Particle · negative ¶

1,060× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Not is a word used to show that something is not true or is not happening, like in phrases that say 'lest' or 'God forbid', as seen in various parts of the New Testament.

Tyndale gloss

not

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μή (mē) is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μή,

subjective negative particle,

used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]

As a neg. adv., not;

with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.

In delib. questions, c. subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mk 12:14, Ro 3:8.

In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mt 10:14,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μή (mē) — not.

μή,

Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)

__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,

__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

μή

me

a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an

absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an

interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an

affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +

lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,

nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in

substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,

3373, 3375, 3378.

see GREEK for 3756

see GREEK for 3362

see GREEK for 3363

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

see GREEK for 3373

see GREEK for 3375

see GREEK for 3378

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μή

Neg.prt.

not, lest

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μή mē 1x

a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

71%not

not71% · 772×except9% · 95×unless5% · 58×surely not4% · 41×lest3% · 32×otherwise2% · 23×other renderings4% · 48×other renderings1% · 16×

1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial84%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

καίand, even, also,σύἐγώ

ἵναin order that, so th

αὐτόςσύπροσεύχομαιI pray, pray for

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώαὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist

εἰCond

αὐτόςυἱόςa son, descendenκαίand, even, also,

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,εἰςδιά

μήnot1060×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenσημεῖονa sign, miracle,

ἔχωI have, hold, posses

καίand, even, also,ποιμήνa shepherdβάθοςdepth, a depth,

εἰμίI am, exist

δίδωμιI offer, giveἐνμετά

τὶς

σύὑστερέωI am lacking, faγεννάωI beget, bring f

φοβέωI fear, am terrified

ἀπόὁArticle theμόνοςalone, but, only

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμή · 1,060× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew John 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Timothy Galatians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

εἰCond×ἐάνCond×φοβέωI fear, am terrified×βλέπωI look, see×πότεIrg×μηδέNeg×ἐσθίωI eat×πλανάωI lead astray, deceive×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַלadv. of negation, denying however, not objectively a20%H408 · 273 verses

Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

φάνῃphainō may shine G5316 Verb · second aorist · passive · subjunctive · third person · singular ¶

31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means to shine or appear, and can be used literally or figuratively, as in John 1:5 and 2 Peter 1:19. It can also mean to bring something to light or make it visible, like in Matthew 2:7 and Hebrews 11:3.

Amplified meaning

appear, be seen

Tyndale gloss

to shine/appear

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

φαίνω (phaino) means to bring to light or cause to appear, and can also mean to shine or be seen. It is used in various contexts, from physical light to metaphorical appearances in thoughts or judgments. The New Testament employs it in verses such as John 1:5 and Matthew 1:20, indicating both literal and figurative senses. There is some variation in how lexicons describe its usage, particularly regarding its passive forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φαίνω

[in LXX for אור hi., ראה ni., etc. ;]

Act.,

to bring to light, cause to appear (so most freq. in cl.).

Absol., to give light, shine (Hom., Plat., al.): Jo 1:5 5:35, II Pe 1:19, I Jo 2:8, Re 1:16 8:12 18:23 21:23.

Pass., to come to light, appear, be manifest: Mt 2:7 13:26 24:27, 30, Lk 9:8, Phl 2:15, He 11:3, I Pe 4:18 (LXX); opp. to ἀφανίζεσθαι, Ja 4:14; c. dat. pers. (Bl. § 54, 4), Mt 1:20 2:13, 19, Mk 16:9; c. nom. pred.,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

φαίνω; [1 aor. act. subjune. 3 pers. sing. avy, LT WH in Rev. viii. 12; xviii. 23, (see below and dvadaivw; W §15 5. v.; B.41(35))]; Pass., pres. φαίνομαι; 2 aor. ἐφάνην; 2 fut. φανήσομαι and (in 1 Pet. iv. 18) φανοῦμαι (cf. Kithner § 343s. v.; [Veitchs.v.]); (φάω) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to bring forth into the light, cause to shine; to show. In bibl. Grk. 1. Active intransitively, to shine, shed light, (which the Grks. [commonly (cf. L. and S.s. ν. A. IT.)] express by the passive), Sept. for VND: τὸ φῶς φαίνει, Jn. i. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 8; ὁ λύχνος, Jn. v. 85; 2 Pet. i. 19, (1 Mace. iv. 50; Gen. i. 17); ὁ ἥλιος, Rev. i. 16 ; ὁ ἥλ. καὶ ἡ σελήνη, Rev. xxi. 23; ἡ ἡμέρα, Rey. viii. 12 Ree. 2. Passive, a. to shine, be bright or resplendent: ἡ ἡμέρα, Rev. viii. 12 Tr [(see above); xviii. 23 RG Tr—but see Veitchs.v.; moreover, the foll. exx. should be brought under the next head; see Meyer…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φαίνω (phainō) — to shine/appear.

φαίνω,

[Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect also φαείνω (which see):—future φᾰνῶ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect φᾰνέω (ἀπο-) [Refs 5th c.BC+], optative φᾰνοίην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἔφηνα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἔφᾱνα [Refs 5th c.BC+]subjunctive, ἀπο-φάνῃ uncertain reading in [Refs]; φάνῃς [Refs 4th c.BC+]; so in late Prose, (ἐξ-) [NT+2nd c.AD+]; Epic dialect iterative φάνεσκε (intransitive) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect πέφαγκα [Refs 4th c.BC+]perfect πέφηνα (see. below[Refs], Doric dialect3rd.pers. plural ἐκ-πεφάναντι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; pluperfect ἐπεφήνειν [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:—middle, future infinitive φᾰνεῖσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect φᾰνέομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; the forms φανῆσθον and Doric dialect imperative φάνευ are corrupt in [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist 1 ἐφηνάμην (transitive) [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, Ionic dialect imperfect…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

φαίνω

phaino

prolongation for the base of 5457; to lighten (shine), i.e. show

(transitive or intransitive, literal or figurative):-- appear, seem,

be seen, shine, X think.

see GREEK for 5457

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φαίνω

v.

I shine, appear, seem

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

φαίνω phainō 31x

to cause to appear, bring to light; absol. to shine, Jn. 1:5; 5:35; 2 Pet. 1:19; 1 Jn. 2:8; Rev. 1:16; 8:12; 21:23; mid./pass. to be seen, appear, be visible, Mt. 1:20; 2:7, 13, 19; τὰ φαινόμενα, things visible, things obvious to the senses, Heb. 11:3; φαίνομαι, to appear, seen, be in appearance, Mt. 23:27; Lk. 24:11; to appear in thought, seen in idea, be a notion, Mk.…

Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

φαίνω φάω Act. to bring to light, make to appear, Hom., etc.:—Mid. to exhibit as one's own, Soph.

to shew forth, make known, reveal, disclose, shew, Od., Soph. etc.: γόνον Ἑλένηι φ. to shew her a child, i. e. grant her to bear one, Od.

of sound, to make it clear to the ear, make it ring clear, id. Od., Aesch.

to make clear, explain, expound, Hdt.

in attic to inform against one, to indict, impeach, Ar.:— to inform of a thing as contraband, id. Ar.: Pass., τὰ φανθέντα articles informed against as contraband, Dem.

absol. to give information, Xen.

φαίνειν φρουράν at Sparta, to proclaim a levy, call out the array, id. Xen.

absol. to give light, Od.; so of the sun, moon, etc., φ. τινί Ar., Theocr.; so of the Dioscuri shining in mid-air, Eur.; ἀγανὴ φαίνουσ᾽ ἐλπίς soft shining hope, Aesch.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-2APS-3S — Verb · second aorist · passive · subjunctive · third person · singular
second aorist passive subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2APS-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Subjunctive Person: third Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

shin: The Hebrew words 'ahal, 'or, halal, zahar, zarach, yapha`, naghah, `ashath and qaran are all translated "shine." All indicate either the direct or indirect diffusion of beams of light. In a direct and literal sense the word "shine" is used of the heavenly bodies, or of candles, and fire (Job 18:5; 25:5 the King James Version; Job 29:3; 31:26; 2Ki 3:22). In a figurative sense it is used of reflected light or brightness, in any sense (Ex 34:29 f,35; Isa 60:1; Eze 43:2; Da 12:3). God as the sun of righteousness…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

10%shining

shining10% · 3×shines10% · 3×appeared10% · 3×may appear6% · 2×appearing6% · 2×appears6% · 2×appear6% · 2×it may be shown as3% · 1×other renderings42% · 13×

31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 21 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb81%linking verb13%object3%adverbial3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

μήNeg

ὅπωςhow, in order thἡμέραa dayοὐNeg

καίand, even, also, nam

ἀνατολήrising of the suκαίωI ignite, light,

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἄγγελοςan angel, messen

ὅπωςhow, in order that,

προσεύχομαιI pray, pray forαὐτός

τότεthen

ποιέωI do, makeκαίand, even, also,

φαίνωmay shine31×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thσημεῖονa sign, miracle,δέbut, on the othe

ἐν

αὐχμηρόςdingy, dusky, obὁArticle theσύ

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakὁArticle the

κατά

ὄναρindcl

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceφαίνω · 31× in the New Testament

Matthew Revelation John Luke Mark 1 John 1 Peter 2 Corinthians 2 Peter Hebrews James Philippians

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the human race×ἵναin order that, so that×κατά×ὄναρindcl×ὅπωςhow, in order that, so that×ὡςas, like as, how, while, so that×ἄγγελοςan angel, messenger×νηστεύωI fast×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

עַ֫יִןeye23%H5869 · 6 verses שָׁמַיonly pl. שָׁמַיִם heavens, sky19%H8064 · 5 verses אוֹרbe or become light .—become light, shine of sun (esp15%H215 · 4 verses

Counted over the 26 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 141c. AD 40

ὅμοιον δή τι πεπονθέναι καὶ τὸ γένος τῶν ἀνθρώπων φαίνεται καθ’ ἑκάστην γενεὰν ἀμυδροτέρας λαμβανόντων τάς τε τοῦ σώματος καὶ τὰς τῆς ψυχῆς δυνάμεις καὶ ποιότητας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.24c. AD 75–95

φανεῖται γὰρ σκοπουμένοις οὕτως οὐδὲν οὔτʼ ἄλογον αὐτοῖς οὔτε πρὸς τὴν μεγαλειότητα τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τὴν φιλανθρωπίαν ἀνάρμοστον·

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 12.4c. AD 96

ὃν τρόπον οὖν σου τὸ σῶμα φαίνεται, οὕτως καὶ ἡ ψυχή σου δῆλος ἔστω ἐν τοῖς καλοῖς ἔργοις.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Athen.. 19ArsinoitesAD 153

καιρῷ. λήμψομαι δὲ τὰ ἐκ δημοσίου χρήματα καὶ σπέρματα· βεβαίωσις ἥδε … λοιπῶν τὰ φαίνονται καὶ ἐπιτελέσω τὰ τῆς κληρουχίας γεωργικὰ ἔργα πάντα ὅσα καθήκει· ἐὰν φαίνηται μισθῶσαι. Ὄννωφρις

P.Cair. Isid. 101ArsinoitesAD 300

καὶ μετὰ τὸν χρόνον παραδώσω τὰς ἀρούρας ἀπὸ καλάμης καθὼς καὶ ἐγὼ παρέλαβα, ἐὰν φαίνεται μισθῶσαι. καὶ ἐπερωτηθεῖσα ὡμολόγησα. Αὐρηλία Σερηνίλλα διʼ ἐμοῦ Ζωίλου υἱοῦ μεμίσθωκα ὡς πρόκιται. Αὐρήλιοι

P.Col. 7 179Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 300

τὸν χρόνον παραδώσω τὸν ἐλαιῶνα τετευχότα τῶν δε… πάντων ὡς καὶ ἐγὼ παρέλαβον, ἐὰν φαίνεται μισθῶσαι. καὶ ἐπερωτηθεὶς ὡμολόγησα. αὐρηλία Θερμουθᾶρις μεμίσθωκα ἐπὶ ἡμίσει μέρει ὡς πρόκιται. Αὐρήλιος Μίκκαλος

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

ἐνen in G1722 Preposition ¶

2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.

Tyndale gloss

in/on/among

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

79%in

in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg

ἐγώ

μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς

ἐνin2743×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theμένωI remain, abide

σύ

εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existὁArticle the

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μένωI remain, abide×ἱερόςa temple×συναγωγήan assembly, congregation, synagogue×μέσοςmiddle, in the middle×ἔρημοςdeserted, desolate, a desert×

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

σοὶsu you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · dative · singular ¶

2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.

Tyndale gloss

you

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-2DS — Personal pronoun · second person · dative · singular
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2DS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Dative Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

78%you

you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg

ἐν

ὁArticle theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein

πρός

ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de

σύyou2892×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐν

ἐν

ὁArticle theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament

Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀμήνHebr×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַתָּ֫האָ֑תָּה pron. 2 s. m. thou H859b אתי, i.e. אתִּי, th66%H859 · 301 verses

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

ἔτι,eti any longer, G2089 Adverb ¶

93× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Still means something is ongoing or continues to happen, as seen in Mark 5:35 and 1 Corinthians 3:3. It can also mean yet or even, showing something is happening at the present time or will happen in the future.

Tyndale gloss

still

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔτι (eti) is an adverb meaning 'yet,' 'still,' or 'even now.' It covers various temporal aspects—present, past, and future—as well as degrees of comparison. In the New Testament, it appears in verses like Mark 5:35 and 1 Corinthians 3:3. The entries indicate its use with negatives to mean 'no longer' and in comparative phrases to enhance meaning.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔτι

adv.,

yet, as yet, still;

of time;

of the present (adhuc): Mk 5:35, I Co 3:3 15:17, Ga 1:10, al.;

of the past, mostly c. impf.: Mt 12:46, Lk 8:49 15:20, Jo 20:1, Ac 9:1, Ro 5:6, 8, II Th 2:5, He 7:10 9:8, al.;

of the future: Lk 1:15, II Co 1:10;

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔτι, adv., as yet, yet, still; 1. of time; a. ofa thing which went on formerly, whereas now a different state of things exists or has begun to exist: arded Ve 4 ἑτοιμάζω to ἃ ptep., Mt. xxvii. 63; Lk. xxiv. 6, 44: Acts ix. 1; xviii. 18; 2 Th. ii. 5; with gen. absol.: ἔτι (δὲ) αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος, Mt. xii. 46; xvil. 5; xxvi. 47; Mk. xiv. 43; Lk. viii. 49; xxii. 47; add, Lk. ix. 42; xxiv. 41; Jn. xx. 1; Acts x. 44; Ro. v. 8; Heb. ix. 8; with a finite verb, Heb. vii. 10; transposed so as to stand at the beginning of a sentence: ἔτι yap Χριστὸς ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθ. . . . ἀπέGave, Ro. v. 6; cf. W. § 61, 5 p. 553 (515); [B. 389 (333)]; with another notation of time, so that it may be trans. even (cf. Lat. jam) : ἔτι ἐκ κοιλίας μητρός, Lk. i. 15 (ἔτι ἐκ Bpépeos, Anthol. 9, 567,1; ἔτι am ἀρχῆς, Plut. consol. ad Apoll. 6 p. 104 d.). ὍὌ. of a thing which continues at present, even now: Mk. viii. 17 RG…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔτι. P Lond 42% (B.c. 168) (=I. p. 30, Selections, p. 10) ὡς ἔτ[ι] σοῦ παρ[όν]τος πάντων ἐπεδεόμην, “ while you were still at home, I went short altogether.’’ In 26. 55 we have— ἔτι δὲ καὶ “Qpov τοῦ τὴν ἐπιστολὴν παρακεκομικό[το]ς ἀπηγγελκότος κτὰλ., “᾿ἀπα now that Horus who brought the letter has told’’ etc.: cf. P Ryl II. 1459 (A.p. 38) ἔτι καὶ μὴ ἀρκ[εσ]θείς. P Oxy IV. 7448 (B.c. 1) (= Selections, p- 32) shows a common phrase γίνωσκε ὡς ἔτι καὶ viv ἐν ᾿Αλεξανδρέᾳ (1. —Spela) σμέν (/. ἐσμέν) : cf. P Hib I. 46% (B.c. 258) ἔτι οὖν καὶ νῦν ἢ τὸ ἀργύριον εἰσάγετε ἢ KTA., “‘now therefore at length either collect the money, or,” εἴς.» Revillout 2761. p. 295% (B.c. 131-0) (= Witkowski’, p. 96) ἔτι kal νῦν καλῶς ποιήσεις παρακαλῶν σαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς παρ᾽ ἡμῶν, P Oxy VIII. τατι 13 (a.p. 203) ὃν δηλ(ῶ) τετελ(ευτηκέναι) ἔτι πάλαι, ‘whom I declare to have died long ago.” For the adv. used of degree…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔτι (eti) — still.

ἔτι [ῐ],

adverb:

I. of Time,

I.1. of the Present, yet, still, ἔ. μοι μένος ἔμπεδον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔτ᾽ ἐκ βρέφεος ever since babyhood, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔ. καὶ ἐκ παρόντων variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. of the Past, mostly with imperfect, ἀήθεσσον γὰρ ἔτ᾽ αὐτῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with aorist, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. πρότερον, πρόσθεν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with the sense, already, γεγονέναι ἔ. οὐχ ἧττον ἢ εἶναι [Refs]

I.3. of the Future, yet, longer, ἄλγε᾽ ἔδωκεν.. ἠδ᾽ ἔ. δώσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; hereafter, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.4. with a negative, no longer, οὐδὲ.. ἔ. παρέμειναν [Refs 1st c.BC+]; see at {οὐκέτι},{μηκέτι}.

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔτι

eti

perhaps akin to 2094; "yet," still (of time or degree):--after that,

also, ever, (any) further, (t-)henceforth (more), hereafter, (any)

longer, (any) more(-one), now, still, yet.

see GREEK for 2094

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔτι

Adv

still, yet, even now

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔτι eti 93x

yet, still, Mt. 12:46; still, further, longer, Lk. 16:2; further, besides, in addition, Mt. 18:16; with a compar. yet, still, Phil. 1:9

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔτι

of Time,

of the Present, yet, as yet, still, Lat. adhuc, Il., attic; cf. οὐκέτι.

of the Past, mostly with imperf., ἀήθεσσον γὰρ ἔτι they were yet unaccustomed, Il.; προορωμένοις ἔτι Thuc.

of the Future, yet, further, ἄλγε᾽ ἔδωκεν, ἠδ᾽ ἔτι δώσει Il.:—also hereafter, Aesch., Soph.

of Degree, yet, still, besides, further, moreover, Lat. praeterea, insuper, Hom., etc.; ἔτι δέ and besides, nay more, Thuc.

often to strengthen a comp., ἔτι μᾶλλον yet more, Il.; μᾶλλον ἔτι Od.; ἔτι πλέον Hdt., etc.

with the posit., ἔτι ἄνω yet higher up, Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

36%still

still36% · 34×yet21% · 20×any longer16% · 15×any more6% · 6×more4% · 4×while4% · 4×while still2% · 2×anymore2% · 2×other renderings8% · 8×

95 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial91%object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 93 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

σύ

ἐνμετάλαλέωI speak, say

τίςIrg

λέγωI say, speakφυλάσσωI keep, guard, oβλασφημέωI speak evil aga

εἰμίI am, exist

οὐNegἀλλάbut, except

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐπιτάσσωI give order, coμέγαςὅτιthat, since, bec

ὅτιthat, since, because

λέγωI say, speakθεόςGod, a godμνημονεύωI remember, make

ἔτιany longer,93×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theφωνήa sound, noise, γράφωI write

αὐτός

λαλέωI speak, sayπόρρωComp

δέbut, on the other ha

προσέρχομαιI come near, conαὐτόςἀπιστέωI am unfaithful,

εἰμίI am, exist

ἐνσύνεἰς

γάρfor

Χριστόςanointed, the Meσαρκικόςfleshly, carnalἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔτι · 93× in the New Testament

Revelation Luke Hebrews John Matthew Romans Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Galatians 2 Corinthians 2 Thessalonians

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

λαλέωI speak, say×τίςIrg×μικρόςlittle, small×οὐδέNeg×χρείαneed, necessity, business×ἅγιοςset apart, holy, sacred×δύναμαιI am powerful, am able×ἔτιstill, yet, even now×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

עוֹדand (14 t.) עֹד subst. a going round, continuance, b72%H5750 · 199 verses

Counted over the 276 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 18c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὥσπερ ἐν κηρῷ τῇ ἑαυτοῦ ψυχῇ τοὺς ἑκάστων δεξάμενος τύπους ἀγαλματοφορεῖ νοητὴν πόλιν, ἧς ἀνακινήσας τὰ εἴδωλα μνήμῃ τῇ συμφύτῳ καὶ τοὺς χαρακτῆρας ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐνσφραγισάμενος, οἷα δημιουργὸς ἀγαθός, ἀποβλέπων εἰς τὸ παράδειγμα τὴν ἐκ λίθων καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.9c. AD 75–95

τούτῳ δὴ πειθόμενος ὡς αἰεὶ τοῖς χρήσιμον ἢ καλόν τι πράττειν δυναμένοις συμφιλοκαλοῦντι καὶ ἐμαυτὸν αἰσχυνόμενος, εἰ δόξαιμι ῥαθυμίᾳ πλέον ἢ τῷ περὶ τὰ κάλλιστα χαίρειν πόνῳ, προθυμότερον ἐπερρώσθην, ἔτι κἀκεῖνα πρὸς τοῖς εἰρημένοις λογισάμενος οὐ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.5c. AD 100

τότε βοήσεις, καὶ ὁ θεὸς ἐπακούσεταί σου, ἔτι λαλοῦντός σου ἐρεῖ: Ἰδοὺ πάρειμι: ἐὰν ἀφέλῃς ἀπὸ σοῦ σύνδεσμον καὶ χειροτονίαν καὶ ῥῆμα γογγυσμοῦ, καὶ δῷς πεινῶντι τὸν ἄρτον σου ἐκ ψυχῆς σου καὶ ψυχὴν τεταπεινωμένην ἐλεήσῃς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC

P.Edg. $1Philadelphia (Arsinoites)242 BC

εἰ μὲν οὖν διείλεξαι τῶι Κράτωνι καὶ ὑπακήκοε, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι· εἰ δὲ μή, ἔτι καὶ νῦν μὴ παρέργως αὐτὸ ποιήσας, ὅπως μὴ συμβῇ ἀναπληρουμένης τῆς ὠνῆς προεισπραχθέντα τὸν

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59368Memphis (?)242 BC

σμηνῶν … τὸ ἀντίγραφον ὑπογέγραφα ε … … τὸ παρʼ ἡμῶν ὑπόμνημα … μὴ ἔτι καὶ νῦν ὁ Ἀμμώνιος ἐξευδοκῆι ὑμᾶς καὶ π … … καὶ τῶν σμηνῶν, τούς

Archiv für Papyrusforschung (AfP) 2 (1903), p. 517-518Pathyris131 BC

πλειονάκις σοι γράφω περὶ τοῦ διανδραγαθήσαντα σαυτοῦ ἐπιμέλεσθαι μέχρι τοῦ τὰ πράγματα ἀποκαταστῆναι , ἔτι καὶ νῦν καλῶς ποιήσεις παρακαλῶν σαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς παρʼ ἡμῶν· προσπέπτωκεν γὰρ Παῶν ἀναπλεῖν

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίand8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

φωνὴphōnē [the] voice G5456 Noun · nominative · singular · feminine ¶

139× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Voice or sound refers to any kind of noise, like a person speaking or an animal making a sound. In the Bible, it is used in Matthew 2:18 and Acts 2:14 to describe a voice or sound. It can also mean a language or saying.

Amplified meaning

sounds, utterances

Tyndale gloss

voice/sound: noise

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

φωνή is a feminine noun meaning 'voice' or 'sound,' primarily associated with articulate sounds made by humans and animals. It can also refer to sounds from inanimate objects and encompasses speech, language, and tones. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, such as in Matthew 2:18 and John 3:8. Notably, the lexicons differ on whether it can apply to inanimate sounds, with some sources emphasizing its primary association with living beings.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — φωνή, λόγος from a scan

On these words, and on their relation to one another, very much has been written by the Greek grammarians and natural philosophers (see Lersch, Sprachphilosophie der Alten, vol. iii. pp. 85, 45, and passim). Φωνή, from φάω, ds φωτίζουσα τὸ νοούμενον (Plutarch, De Plac. Phil. 19), rendered in our Version ‘ voice’ (Matt. ii. 18), ‘sound’ (John iii. 8), ‘noise’ (Rev. vi. 1), is distinguished from ψόφος, in that it is the cry of a living creature (ἡ δὲ φωνὴ ψόφος τίς ἐστιν ἐμψύχου, Aristotle, De Anima, 2. 8. 14), being sometimes ascribed to God (Matt. ui. 17), to men (Matt. iii. 3), to animals (Rev. ix. 9), and, though improperly, to inanimate objects as well (1 Cor. xiv. 7), as to the trumpet (Matt. xxiv. 31), to the wind (John iii. 8), to the thunder (Rev. vi. 1; οἵ. Ps. lxxvi. 19). But λόγος, a word, saying, or rational utterance of the νοῦς, whether spoken (προφορικός, and thus φωνὴ τῶν…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φωνή, -ῆς, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for קוֺל ;]

a voice;

prop., of persons, Mt 2:18 (LXX), al.; φ. αἴρειν (ἐπαίρειν), Lk 17:13, Ac 2:14, al.; φ. μεγάλῃ εἰπεῖν (λέγειν, φωνεῖν, etc.), Lk 8:28, Ac 7:57, Re 5:12, al.; γίνεται (ἔρχεται) φ. ἐκ τ. οὐρανῶν (ἐξ οὐρανοῦ), Mk 1:11, Lk 3:22, Jo 12:28, al. (cf. DCG, ii, 810a; Dalman, Words, 204 f.); ἀκούειν φωνήν (-ῆς; v.s. ἀκούω), Ac 9:4, 7 al.; φ.…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

φωνή, -ἢς, ἡ, (φάω to shine, make clear, [ef. Curtius §407; L. and S.s. v. φάω]), fr. Hom. down, Hebr. Tips 1. a sound, tone: of inanimate things, as of musical instruments, Mt. xxiv. 31 [T om. ¢., WH give it only in mrg.; ef. B. § 132, 10]; 1 Co. xiv. 7 sq.; Rev. xiv. 2; xviii. 22, (Is. xviii. 3; xxiv. 8; Sir. 1.16; 1 Mace. v. 313 ὀργάνων, Plat. de rep. 3 p. 397 ἃ. ; συρίγγων, Eur. Tro. 127; ψαλτηρίου καὶ αὐλοῦ, Plut. mor. p. 713 ¢.); of wind, Jn. iii. 8; Acts ii. 6; of thunder, Rev. vi. 1; xiv. 2; xix. 6, cf. iv. 5; viii. 5; xi. 19; xvi. 18; noise, of a millstone, Rev. xviii. 22; of a thronging multitude, Rev. xix. 1, 6; of chariots, Rev. ix. 9; of wings, whir (Ezek. i. 24), ibid.; of waters (Ezek. i. 24; 4 Esdr. vi. 17), Rev. i. 15; xiv. 2; xix. 6; also with the gen. of a thing implying speech, the sound [A.V. voice]: τοῦ ἀσπασμοῦ, Lk. i. 445 ῥημάτων, Heb. xii. 19; the cry (of men)…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

φωνή, «ἐᾷ sound,” ‘fa voice”: cf P Lond 191257 (A.D. 41) γνησιωτέραις ὑμᾶς φωναῖς προσαγορεύσας, * addressing you more frankly by word of mouth,” P Ryl II. 77% (A.D. 192) ἔχομεν δὴ φωνὴν τοῦ ᾿Ασπιδᾶ, ““ννὲ now have the declaration of Aspidas” (Edd.). In one of the family letters of Paniskos (iii/iv A.D.) from the Michigan papyri edited by J. G. Winter in the Journ. Egypt. Arch. xiii. p. 721 we find wodAdkt[s] φωνὴν αὐ[τῷ] ἐβά[λομ]εν ἵνα ἔλ[θῃ] πρὸς τὸν ἐπανορθωτὴ(ν) ᾿Αχιλλ[έα, ““ννε sent him word repeatedly that he might come to the epanorthotes Achilles” —a phrase for which the editor can find no parallel. For the power of the divine voice cf. Wiinsch 4/ p. 23° (1,4...) διὰ φωνῆς προστάγματος, where the editor compares Ps 32 αὐτὸς εἶπεν, καὶ ἐγενήθησαν. The word is used of Coptic speech in P Lond 7718 (end vi/A.D.) (=I. p. 232) τῇ τῶν Αἰγυπτίων φωνῇ : cf. also P Giss I. 4oll- 27 (A.D.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φωνή (phōnē) — voice/sound: voice.

φων-ή, ἡ,

sound, tone, properly, the sound of the voice, whether of men or animals with lungs and throat (ἡ φωνὴ ψόφος τίς ἐστιν ἐμψύχου [Refs 4th c.BC+]; opposed to φθόγγος (see. φθόγγος [Refs]

I. mostly of human beings, speech, voice, utterance, φ. ἄρρηκτος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φ. δέ οἱ αἰθέρ᾽ ἵκανεν, of Ajax' battle-cry, [Refs]; of the battle-cry of an army, Τρώων καὶ Ἀχαιῶν.. φ. δεινὸν ἀϋσάντων [Refs]: plural, of the cries of market-people, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀξεῖα, βαρυτέρα, λεία, τραχεῖα φ., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μιαρά, ἀναιδής, [Refs 5th c.BC+]with his voice, aloud, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μιᾷ φ. with one voice, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; ἀπὸ φωνῆς, with genitive, dictated by.., [Refs 4th c.AD+] in Euc.Dat.p.234 M., [Refs 4th c.BC+] the notes of the voice, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πᾶσαν, τὸ λεγόμενον, φ. ἱέντα…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

φωνή

phone

probably akin to 5316 through the idea of disclosure; a tone

(articulate, bestial or artificial); by implication, an address (for

any purpose), saying or language:--noise, sound, voice.

see GREEK for 5316

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φωνή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

a sound, noise, voice

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

φωνή phōnē 139x

a sound, Mt. 24:31; Jn. 3:8; Rev. 4:5; 8:5; a cry, Mt. 2:18; an articulate sound, voice, Mt. 3:3, 17; 17:5; 27:46, 50; voice, speech, discourse, Jn. 10:16, 27; Acts 7:31; 12:22; 13:27; Heb. 3:7, 15; tone of address, Gal. 4:20; language, tongue, dialect, 1 Cor. 14:10

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

φωνή φωνή, ἡ, φάω a sound, tone, properly the sound of the voice, mostly of men, Lat. vox, Hom., etc.; of a battlecry, Xen.; φωνὴν ῥηγνύναι, Virgil's rumpere vocem, to utter an articulate sound, Hdt., Ar.; φ. ἱέναι, Lat. vocem edere, Hdt., etc.: pl. αἱ φ. the tones of the voice, Plat.:—proverb., φωνῇ ὁρᾶν, of a blind man, Soph.

the voice or cry of animals, Od., Hdt., etc.

any articulate sound, as opp. to inarticulate (ψόφος), Soph., etc.

of sounds from inanimate objects, φ. συρίγγων Eur.; ὀργάνων Plat.

the faculty of speech, discourse, Lat. sermo, Soph.

language, Lat. lingua, Hdt.

a kind of language, dialect, Aesch., Thuc., etc.

a phrase, saying, τὴν Σιμωνίδου φ. Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

vois.

See BATH KOL.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ OF GOD Eze 1:24,28; 10:5; Joh 5:37; 12:28-30; Ac 7:31; 9:4,7; 26:14,15

See ANTHROPOMORPHISMS

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

67%voice

voice67% · 94×a voice14% · 20×sound9% · 13×voices6% · 9×other renderings2% · 3×other renderings1% · 2×

141 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject40%object29%adverbial28%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 139 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,ἀκούωI hear, listenἐπαίρωI raise, lift up

καίand, even, also, nam

ἀστραπήa flash of lightαὐτόςἔτιstill, yet, even

ἀκούωI hear, listen

καίand, even, also,γῆthe earth, soil,τέταρτοςfourth

ὡςas, like as, how, wh

ἀκούωI hear, listenκαίand, even, also,αὐτός

κράζωI cry aloud, shriek

καίand, even, also,πάλινagain, further, γόνυa knee

φωνή[the] voice139×

what comes after →

μέγας

λέγωI say, speakὁArticle theἐκ

αὐτός

ἀκούωI hear, listenπώποτεat any time, eveκαίand, even, also,

ἐκ

ὁArticle theοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea

ὁArticle the

ἀσπασμόςa greeting, saluνυμφίοςa bridegroomυἱόςa son, descenden

λέγωI say, speak

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceφωνή · 139× in the New Testament

Revelation Acts John Luke Matthew Mark Hebrews 1 Corinthians 2 Peter 1 Thessalonians Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament11 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μέγας×ἀκούωI hear, listen×ἐκ×ὡςas, like as, how, while, so that×κράζωI cry aloud, shriek×πολύςmuch, many, often×οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaven×βροντήthunder×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

קוֹלsound, voice H6963b קֹל lightness, frivolity70%H6963 · 212 verses שָׁמַעhear46%H8085 · 139 verses

Counted over the 302 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 62c. AD 40

χρώματα μὲν [ἡ] ὅρασις, φωνὰς δὲ ἀκοή, χυλοὺς δὲ γεῦσις, καὶ ὄσφρησις ἀτμούς, μαλακότητας δὲ καὶ σκληρότητας καὶ ὅσα θερμὰ ἢ ψυχρὰ λειότητάς τε καὶ τραχύτητας ἁφή.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.1c. AD 100

Λέγει οὖν πάλιν περὶ τούτων πρὸς αὐτούς: Ἱνατί μοι νηστεύετε, λέγει κύριος, ὡς σήμερον ἀκουσθῆναι ἐν κραυγῇ τὴν φωνὴν ὑμῶν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Phil. 3 VoArsinoitesAD 123

φ … … σατε … το γρ … … … πρ … φωνη ἐστι τω … εισγραπτ … … ος ὁ στρατηγός· ἄλλον ἀντʼ αὐτοῦ δότε.

P.Mich. 8 488AD 101–AD 200

σχολάζεις τηρεῖν τὰ ἐκεῖ καὶ ἁρπάζεται ὑπὸ τῶν παραγόντων. ἂν οὐχ εὑρίσκεις ἀποδοῦναι τὴν φωνήν ὡς εἶπας αὐτῷ … … ι ἐμφανής. καὶ πότε θέλεις γένηται ἀμμὰς πρὸς σέ;

P.Oxy. 51 3614OxyrhynchosAD 200

μιᾶς νωνῶν … ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ. μετʼ ἄλλα. Καῖσαρ σκεψάμενος μετὰ τῶν φίλων τῇ πατρίῳ φωνῇ ἀπεφήνατο, ἀναγνοὺς ἐκ βιβλίου, οἱ μὲν ἐπίτροποι ἡμῶν ἕξουσιν διὰ φροντίδος μισθοῦν τὰ τέλη

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

νυμφίουnumphios of a bridegroom G3566 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine ¶

16× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A bridegroom is the husband in a newly formed marriage, like in Matthew 9:15 and John 2:9. Jesus is also called the bridegroom in Mark 2:19-20.

Amplified meaning

husband

Tyndale gloss

bridegroom

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word νυμφίος (i.e., *numphios*) means 'bridegroom.' It is derived from the word for 'bride' (νύμφη) and appears in various New Testament passages, including Matthew and Revelation. The term can also refer to a son-in-law and has been used since ancient times.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

νυμφίος, -ου, ὁ

(< νύμφη),

[in LXX for חָתָן;]

a bridegroom: Mt 9:15 25:1, 5, 6, 10, Mk 2:19, 20, Lk 5:34, 35, Jo 2:9 3:29, Re 18:23.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

νυμφίος, -ov, 5, (νύμφη), a bridegroom: Mt. ix. 15; xxv. 1,5 sq. 10; Mk. ii.19sq.; Lk. v. 34 sq.; In. 11. 9; iii. 29; Rev. xviii. 23. (From Hom. down; Sept for [Γ1.}

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

νυμφίος (numphios) — bridegroom.

νυμφ-ίος, ὁ,

bridegroom, παιδὸς ὀδύρεται ὀστέα καίων νυμφίου [Refs 8th c.BC+]; opposed to νύμφη, [Refs 5th c.BC+] to the bridal pair, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; νυμφίοισι παρθένοις occurs in Ps.-[Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. son-in-law, [LXX]

II. as adjective νύμφιος, α, ον, bridal, τράπεζα νυμφία [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

νυμφίος

numphios

from 3565; a bride-groom (literally or figuratively):--bridegroom.

see GREEK for 3565

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

νυμφίος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a bridegroom

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

νυμφίος nymphios 16x

a bridegroom, Mt. 9:15; 25:1, 5, 6, 10

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Ornaments of Isa 61:10

→ Exempt from military duty De 24:5

→ Companions of Jud 14:11

→ Joy with Mt 9:15; Mr 2:19,20; Lu 5:34,35

→ Parable of Mt 25:1-13

→ Song of So 4:7-16

→ FIGURATIVE Eze 16:8-14

Thompson Chain Reference topics

General References to

De 24:5; Jud 14:11; Ps 19:5; Mt 25:10

---Christ as. SEE CHURCH, THE

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

88%bridegroom

bridegroom88% · 14×a bridegroom6% · 1×bridegroom?6% · 1×

16 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject69%adverbial13%object13%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 16 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

αὐτόςὅςεἰμίI am, exist

νύμφηa bride, daughter-in

ὁArticle the

φωνήa sound, noise, voic

καίand, even, also,

νυμφίοςof a bridegroom16×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

τότεthenὁArticle theνύμφηa bride, daughte

μετά

αὐτός

ὁArticle the

ἀρχιτρίκλινοςmaster of the feἵστημιI cause to stand

ἔρχομαιI come, go

δέbut, on the othe

νυστάζωI nod in sleep, am d

πᾶςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceνυμφίος · 16× in the New Testament

Matthew John Mark Luke Revelation

Across the New Testament5 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀπό×τότεthen×νηστεύωI fast×μετά×ἔρχομαιI come, go×ἔχωI have, hold, possess×νύμφηa bride, daughter-in-law×φωνήa sound, noise, voice×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

חָתָןdaughter's husband, bridegroom85%H2860 · 6 verses כַּלָהdaughter-in-law, bride85%H3618 · 6 verses

Counted over the 7 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Special Laws 1.110c. AD 40

πρὸς δὲ τούτῳ καὶ τὸ γένος ἠκρίβωσε τῶν μελλουσῶν γαμεῖσθαι, προστάξας τῷ μὲν ἀρχιερεῖ μνᾶσθαι μὴ παρθένον μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ ἱέρειαν ἐξ ἱερέων, ἵν’ ἐκ μιᾶς οἰκίας καὶ τρόπον τινὰ τοῦ αὐτοῦ αἵματος ὦσι νυμφίος τε καὶ νύμφη πρὸς ἁρμονίαν ἐπιδειξάμενοι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 13.20c. AD 75–95

ὡς δʼ εἶδον αὐτοὺς ἄγοντας τὴν παρθένον καὶ τὸν νυμφίον καὶ φίλων σὺν αὐτοῖς οἷον εἰκὸς ἐν γάμοις ὄχλον, ἀναπηδήσαντες ἐκ τῆς ἐνέδρας ἀπέκτειναν ἅπαντας καὶ τὸν κόσμον καὶ τὴν ἄλλην ὅση τότε εἵπετο λεία τοῖς ἀνθρώποις λαβόντες ὑπέστρεψαν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 7th c. AD

CPR 1 30 fr. 2Herakleopolis (Herakleopolites)AD 539–AD 565

ἀσφάλειαν. Μέγας ὁ λαμπρότατος νοτάριος καὶ δ … το … ε … … καὶ νυμφίος υἱὸς Μηνᾶ τοῦ λαμπροτάτου ἀπὸ Ἰουστινιανοῦ πόλεως τῆς κατὰ Ἀλεξάνδρειαν ὁ προγεγραμμένος ὁμολογῶ θεοῦ

P.Cair. Masp. 1 67006 VoAntinoopolis (?)AD 566–AD 570

ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τῶν γάμων· νῦν οὖν τῇ προνοίᾳ τοῦ Κρίττονος ἔδοξε … … νύμφιος τοὺς σταγμοὺς ἐπιτελέσαι καὶ ἔγγραφον προικῷον θέσθαι μεταξὺ αὐτῶν ἀμφοτέρων κατὰ τὴν τῶν νόμων

SB 16 12942AD 601–AD 700

γνῶσις ἱματίων λόγῳ τοῦ νυμφίου· οὕτως· στρώματα ἕνδεκα ια στρώματα ἀπὸ Μασούρας ὀκτώ η φροντάρια ἀπὸ Μασούρας ἕξ ϛ

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίand8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

νύμφηςnumphē a bride G3565 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine ¶

8× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A bride is a newly married woman, often veiled, as seen in Matthew 25:1 and Revelation 21:2. This term also refers to a daughter-in-law. In the Bible, it symbolizes a new relationship with God.

Amplified meaning

newly married woman

Tyndale gloss

bride

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word νύμφη (*nymphē*) means 'bride' or 'young wife' and can also refer to a 'daughter-in-law.' It appears in the New Testament in verses like John 3:29 and Revelation 21:2. The word is derived from a verb meaning 'to veil as a bride.' It has a range of meanings, including a betrothed girl and, in some contexts, a marriageable maiden.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

νύμφη, -ης, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly for כַּלָּה;]

cl., a bride, young wife, young woman: Mt 25:1, WH, mg., Jo 3:29, Re 18:23 21:2, 9 22:17.

As freq. in LXX (Ge 38:11, al., for כַּלָּה;

bride;

daughter-in-law) and in MGr. (νύφφη, νύφη), a daughter-in-law: Mt 10:35, Lk 12:53.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

νύμφη, -ns, ἡ, (appar. allied w. Lat. nubo; Vanicek p. 429 sq.), Sept. for 793; 1. a betrothed woman, a bride: Jn. iii. 29; Rev. xviii. 23; xxi. 2,9; xxii. 17. 2. in the Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, a recently married woman, young wife; a young woman; hence in bibl. and eccl. Grk., like the Hebr. 743 (which signifies both a bride and a daughter-in-law [ef. W. 32]), a daughter-inlaw: Mt.x.35; Lk. xii.53. (Mie. vii.6; Gen. xi. 31; [xxxviii. 11]; Ruth i. 6, [ete.]; also Joseph. antt. 95, 9, 1.)

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

νύμφη (numphē) — bride.

νύμφ-η, ἡ

(Epic dialect vocative νύμφᾰ [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 4th c.AD+]; later also as nominative, [Refs]; but Doric dialect νύμφᾱ), young wife, bride, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; opposed to νυμφίος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to παρθένος, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. marriageable maiden, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

3. daughter-in-law, [LXX+NT]

4. young girl, πενταέτης ν. [Refs]

II. “Nymph” or goddess of lower rank, θεαὶ Νύμφαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] (anapaest meter; compare Ναϊάς, Νηρηΐς); N. Ὀρεστιάδες, Ὀρειάδες, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; N. ὑάδες, ὑδριάδες, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; N. λειμωνιάδες, πετραῖαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

νύμφη

numphe

from a primary but obsolete verb nupto (to veil as a bride; compare

Latin "nupto," to marry); a young married woman (as veiled), including

a betrothed girl; by implication, a son's wife:--bride, daughter in

law.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

νύμφη, ης, ἡ

n.f.

a bride, daughter-in-law

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

νύμφη nymphē 8x

a bride, Jn. 3:29; Rev. 18:23; 21:2, 9; 22:17; opposed to πενθερά, a daughter-in-law, Mt. 10:35; Lk. 12:53*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

νύμφη νύμφη, ἡ, epic voc. νύμφα^: doric νύμφα_:—, a young wife, bride, Lat. nupta, Il., Trag.

any married woman, Od., Eur.

a marriageable maiden, Il., Hes.

= Lat. nurus, daughter-in-law, NTest.

as prop. name, a Nymph, Hom.; θεαὶ Νύμφαι Il.; distinguished by special names, spring- nymphs being Ναϊάδες, sea- nymphs Νηρηίδες, tree- nymphs Δρυάδες, Ἁμαδρυάδες, mountain- nymphs ὀρεστιάδες, ὀρεάδες, meadow- nymphs λειμωνιάδες.

persons in a state of rapture, as seers and poets, were said to be caught by the Nymphs, νυμφόληπτοι, Lat. lymphatici.

the chrysalis, or pupa of moths, Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

brid.

See MARRIAGE.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Bride

Frequently used in the ordinary sense (Isa. 49:18; 61:10, etc.). The relation between Christ and his church is set forth under the figure of that between a bridegroom and bride (John 3:29). The church is called “the bride” (Rev. 21:9; 22:17). Compare parable of the Ten Virgins (Matt. 25:1-13).

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Ornaments of Isa 49:18; 61:10; Jer 2:32; Re 21:2

→ Presents to Ge 24:53

→ Maids of Ge 24:59,61; 29:24,29

→ FIGURATIVE Ps 45:10-17; Eze 16:8-14; Re 19:7,8; 21:2,9; 22:17

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

63%bride

bride63% · 5×daughter-in-law38% · 3×

8 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

object38%subject38%adverbial25%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐπίἔχωI have, hold, poσύ

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςνυμφίοςa bridegroom

ὡςas, like as, how, wh

ἑτοιμάζωI make ready, pr

νύμφηa bride8×

what comes after →

κατά

ὁArticle the

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,

ἐπί

ὁArticle the

νυμφίοςa bridegroom

εἰμίI am, exist

οὐNeg

μήNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceνύμφη · 8× in the New Testament

Revelation Luke John Matthew

Across the New Testament4 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

πενθεράa mother-in-law×ἐπί×νύμφηa bride, daughter-in-law×νυμφίοςa bridegroom×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

כַּלָהdaughter-in-law, bride86%H3618 · 26 verses

Counted over the 30 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.74c. AD 40

τεύξῃ δὲ τῶν ἄθλων, ἐὰν γυνή σου γένηται ἡ τοῦ Ἰούδα νύμφη Θάμαρ, ἥτις ἑρμηνεύεται φοῖνιξ, σύμβολον νίκης·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 13.18c. AD 75–95

Ὑπὸ τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ καιρὸν παραγενόμενός τις πρὸς Ἰωνάθην καὶ τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ Σίμωνα τοὺς Ἀμαραίου παῖδας ἀπήγγειλεν αὐτοῖς γάμον ἐπιτελοῦντας καὶ τὴν νύμφην ἄγοντας ἀπὸ Ναβαθὰ πόλεως θυγατέρα τινὸς οὖσαν τῶν ἐπιφανῶν παρὰ τοῖς Ἄραψιν, μέλλειν δὲ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 5th c. AD

Aegyptus 43 (1963), p. 397-398AD 125–AD 126

νύμφη Πετρείῳ χαίρειν ἀπέχω παρὰ σοῦ τὸ ἐνοίκιον τοῦ διεληλυθότος ἐννάτου ἔτους ου ἔχεις κε

AnalPap 37 (2024), p. 23-37AD 301–AD 325

ἀγορασθέντα δραχμῶν δ, περὶ ὧν μοι οὐκ ἀντέγραψας, καὶ διὰ τοῦ Ναυτησιφάρου τοῦ Πλουσίου. νύμφῃ Πανσοφίου ὀειὸν τρουθ … μέγα καὶ σφυρίδιον μικρόν. ἔχωσι ῥάκεα φοινίκεα, οὐδὲ περὶ τούτων

P.Ant. 2 93AD 301–AD 400

τῇ τιμιωτάτῃ μου Νόννᾳ Παπάις χαίρειν. πρὸ πάντων προσαγορεύω σε καὶ τὴν δέσποινάν μου νύμφην. ἐδήλωσα τῇ χρηστότητι ὑμῶν καὶ διὰ Σερήνου ἀναγνώστου ὡς ἵνα σπουδάσῃς καὶ προνοήσῃ μου

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

οὐou certainly G3756 Particle · negative ¶

1,622× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This is a strong 'no', used to deny something completely. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 13:29 and John 1:21. It is a negative answer to a question.

Tyndale gloss

no

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὐ (transliterated as ou) is a primary negative particle meaning 'not' or 'no.' It is used to negate verbs or statements, often appearing in various forms depending on the following sound. In the New Testament, it frequently serves to deny facts and is distinct from another negative particle, μή (transliterated as mē), which is used for prohibitions or wishes.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Ac 2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., § 409; M, Pr., 44, 244),

[in LXX for לֹא, אַיִן, אֵין;]

neg. particle,

not, no, used generally c. indic. and for a denial of fact (cf . μή);

absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mt 13:29, Jo 1:21 21:5; οὒ οὔ, Mt 5:37, Ja 5:12.

Most freq. negativing a verb or other word, Mt 1:25 10:26, 38, Mk 3:25 9:37, Jo 8:29, Ac 7:5, Ro 1:16, Phl 3:3, al.; in…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a smooth breathing, and ody before an aspirated vowel ; but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mrg. have adopted οὐχ ἰδού, Acts ii. 7; LT οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, Acts iii. 6] in cod. x [alsoC*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 ἔβαν. iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviiil. 11, 26]); cf. W. $5, 14d. 14; Β. τ; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, pp: 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. pp: Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ου to make the voyage” (Edd.), and P Amh II. 78?! (a.p. 184) τοιαύτης ο[ὖ]ν αὐθαδίας ἐν αὐτῷ οὔσης οὐ δυνάμενος [ἐν]καρτερεῖν ἐπιδίδωμι, ‘“ his audacity having reached this pitch I can endure no longer and present this petition.” See further Proleg. p. 231 f. In support of the translation ‘‘ I determined not to know” in 1 Cor 2, we may cite P Par 2657 (B.c. 163) (= UPZi. Ρ-. 248) οὐκ ἐκρίναμεν καταχωρῆσαι, ‘we determined not to record,” P Tebt I. 124° (c. B.c. 118) οὐκ (ἐκδρίναμεν ἐξαρ[ιθ]μεῖ[σθαι, “we determined not to be counted,” and the classical formula in P Hamb I. 27° (B.c. 250 (249)) οὐκ ἔφη εἰδέναι, ‘he said that he did not know.” The origin of the double negative οὐ μή is fully discussed by Moulton Pro/eg. p. 187 ff. When we pass to its actual occurrences in the NT, we find that these for the most part are found in passages derived from the OT and in the Sayings of our Lord…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὐ (ou) — no.

οὐ,

the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. as the negative of single words,

II. as the negative of the sentence.

I. οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε.. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

οὐ

ou

ouk ook, and (before an aspirate)

ouch ookh

a primary word; the absolute negative (compare 3361) adverb; no or

not:--+ long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, +

nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but. See also

3364, 3372.

see GREEK for 3361

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὐ

Neg.prt.

no, not

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὐ ou 1x

negative adverb, originally the gen. of ὅς, spelled οὐκ if followed by a word beginning with a vowel and a smooth breathing, οὐχ if followed by a vowel and rough breathing, not, no, Mt. 5:37; 12:43; 23:37; for the peculiarities of its usage (especially as distinct from μή) consult a grammar

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

82%not

not82% · 1383×certainly6% · 96×surely4% · 70×no longer3% · 50×no2% · 39×other renderings3% · 51×

1,689 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial82%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,622 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

εἰμίI am, existἐγώαὐτός

ὅς

ἐγώθερίζωI reap, gatherδέbut, on the othe

ὅτιthat, since, because

σύαὐτόςἐγώ

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakἐνἐπί

σύ

λέγωI say, speakγάρforὅς

οὐcertainly1622×

what comes after →

εἰμίI am, exist

ἐκὁArticle theἐγώ

μήNeg

παρέρχομαιI pass byεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inπίνωI drink, imbibe

οἶδαI know, remember

ὅτιthat, since, becὁArticle theτίςIrg

γάρfor

εἰμίI am, existθέλωI will, wish, deὁArticle the

δύναμαιI am powerful, am ab

ἔρχομαιI come, goσῴζωI save, healὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὐ · 1,622× in the New Testament

John Matthew Luke 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts 2 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews 1 John Galatians

8 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

οἶδαI know, remember×δύναμαιI am powerful, am able×οὐδέNeg×μόνοςalone, but, only×χρείαneed, necessity, business×ἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted, lawful, possible×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 6c. AD 40

ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Grenf. 1 17137 BC

δὲ γενόμεναι κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον κληρονομήσασαι ταξάμεναι τὰ καθήκοντα τέλη θεᾶι Βερενίκηι κυριεύομεν. ὅθεν οὐκ ἀποδιδόντων τὰ ἡμέτερα ἐπεδώκαμεν ἐν τῶι λ ἔτει προσανγελίαν Ἡρακλείδει γενομένωι ἀρχιφυλακίτηι τοῦ Παθυρίτου

C.Erbstreit16Diospolis Magna (Theben)135 BC

ι ἀρουρῶν πρόκτησιν … ένου αὐτὸν ἐν συνεδρίωι καὶ συγχώρησιν … ειν, ἐν ἧι οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ὁ πατήρ. ὅθεν καταβεβραβευμένοι … ήρου συνεριου ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι γράψαι, οἷς

P.Adl. 2Pathyris125 BC

ὠνῆς ἐν πίστει διὰ τῶν περὶ τὸν Πανεβχοῦνιν ἐκτελειωθεῖσαν τῶι … ἔτει ἀντὶ ὀφειλημάτων, οὐκ ἐπελευσομένους τὸν Πανερέα καὶ τὴν Σενενοῦπιν περὶ ὀφειλημάτων μηδὲ περὶ ἄλλου μηδενός. ταῦτα δὲ

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

μὴmē not G3361 Particle · negative ¶

1,060× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Not is a word used to show that something is not true or is not happening, like in phrases that say 'lest' or 'God forbid', as seen in various parts of the New Testament.

Tyndale gloss

not

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μή (mē) is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μή,

subjective negative particle,

used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]

As a neg. adv., not;

with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.

In delib. questions, c. subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mk 12:14, Ro 3:8.

In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mt 10:14,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μή (mē) — not.

μή,

Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)

__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,

__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

μή

me

a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an

absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an

interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an

affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +

lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,

nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in

substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,

3373, 3375, 3378.

see GREEK for 3756

see GREEK for 3362

see GREEK for 3363

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

see GREEK for 3373

see GREEK for 3375

see GREEK for 3378

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μή

Neg.prt.

not, lest

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μή mē 1x

a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

71%not

not71% · 772×except9% · 95×unless5% · 58×surely not4% · 41×lest3% · 32×otherwise2% · 23×other renderings4% · 48×other renderings1% · 16×

1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial84%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

καίand, even, also,σύἐγώ

ἵναin order that, so th

αὐτόςσύπροσεύχομαιI pray, pray for

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώαὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist

εἰCond

αὐτόςυἱόςa son, descendenκαίand, even, also,

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,εἰςδιά

μήnot1060×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenσημεῖονa sign, miracle,

ἔχωI have, hold, posses

καίand, even, also,ποιμήνa shepherdβάθοςdepth, a depth,

εἰμίI am, exist

δίδωμιI offer, giveἐνμετά

τὶς

σύὑστερέωI am lacking, faγεννάωI beget, bring f

φοβέωI fear, am terrified

ἀπόὁArticle theμόνοςalone, but, only

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμή · 1,060× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew John 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Timothy Galatians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

εἰCond×ἐάνCond×φοβέωI fear, am terrified×βλέπωI look, see×πότεIrg×μηδέNeg×ἐσθίωI eat×πλανάωI lead astray, deceive×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַלadv. of negation, denying however, not objectively a20%H408 · 273 verses

Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

ἀκουσθῇakouō may be heard G191 Verb · aorist · passive · subjunctive · third person · singular ¶

428× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To hear or listen, not just with our ears but also to understand and obey, as Jesus says in Mark 4:3 and Matthew 11:15. It involves paying attention to what is being said and responding accordingly.

Amplified meaning

be heard, resound

Tyndale gloss

to hear

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀκούω, transliterated as akouo, means 'to hear' or 'to listen.' It covers a range of meanings from simply hearing sounds to understanding and obeying what is said. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including commands to listen (e.g., Mk 4:3) and references to understanding (e.g., 1 Cor 14:2). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀκούω,

[in LXX chiefly for שׁמע;]

to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing.

Intrans.: Mk 4:3 7:37, Ja 2:5, Re 2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mt 13:15(LXX); c. cogn. dat., ακοῇ ἀ. (v.s. ἀκοή), Mt 13:14, Ac 28:26(LXX); ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mt 11:15, Mk 4:23, Re 2:7, al.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀκούω [on the use of the pres. in a pf. sense ef. W. 274 sq. (258); B. 203 (176)]; impf. ἤκουον ; fut. (in best Grk. usage) ἀκούσομαι, Jn. v. 25 RGL, 28 RGL; Acts iii. 22; vii. 37 RG; xvii. 32; [xxi. 22]; xxv. 22; xxviii. 28; [Ro. x. 14 Tdf.], and (a later form) ἀκούσω. Mt. xii. 19; xiii. 14, (both fr. the Sept.) ; [Jn. x. 16; xvi. 13 Tr WH mrg.; Acts xxviii. 26]; Ro. x. 14 ΓΒ 617; and T Tr WH in Jn. v. 25, 28, (ef. W.82 (79); B. 53 (46) [Veitch 5. v.]); [1 aor. ἤκουσα; Jn. iii. 32, ete.]; pf. ἀκήκοα; Pass.,[ pres. ἀκούομαι; 1 fut.axovaOncopar]; 1 aor. ἠκούσθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; tohear. I. absol. 1. tobe endowed with the faculty of hearing (not deaf): Mk. vii. 37; Lk. vii. 22; Mt.xi.5. 2. to attend to (use the faculty of hearing), consider what is or has been said. So in exhortations: ἀκούετε, Mk. iv. 3; ἀκούσατε, Jas. ii. 5; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω, Mt. xi. 15; xiii. 9, [in both T…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀκούω. The verb is of course common enough, and needs little or no illustration, having few peculiarities. Its use for a judicial hearing (as Ac 2523) may be paralleled with P Tand οἷ (ii/A.p.) Kal [pé]x [pr] τούτου οὔπο ἠκούσθ[ημ]εν, and P Oxy VII. 1032 (A.p. 162), where the epistrategus endorses a petition with ἀκουσθήσεται. So in BGU IL. 511i? (= Chrest. 1. p. 26), an account written about A.D. 200 of a trial before Claudius, we have ἀκούει Κλαύδιος Καῖσα[ρ Σέβαστος ᾿Ισιδώρου] γυμνασιάρχου πόλεως ᾿Α[λεξανδρέων] κατὰ ᾿Αγρίππου βασιλέω[ς]. The last example will illustrate ἀκούειν with normal gen. of person: P Par 485 (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski*® p. 91) ἀκούσαντες . . τὰ περὶ σοῦ συνβεβηκότα will serve for accus. vez, and will also illustrate the common use with περί, since the phrase is a mixture of ἀκ. περὶ σοῦ and ἀκ. τά σοι συνβεβηκότα (Witk.).…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀκούω (akouō) — to hear.

ἀκούω:

Epic dialect imperfect ᾰκουον[Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἀκούσομαι (active ἀκούσω first in [NT+4th c.BC+]aorist ἤκουσα, Epic dialect ᾰκουσα[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect ἀκήκοα, Laconian dialect ἄκουκα[Refs 1st c.AD+]; ἤκουκα is a late form, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; later Ionic dialect ἀκήκουκα[Refs 3rd c.BC+]: pluperfect ἀκηκόειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; old Attic dialect ἠκηκόη[Refs 5th c.BC+] —rare in middle, present (see. below [Refs]: Epic dialect imperfect ἀκούετο[Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἠκουσάμην[Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—passive, future ἀκουσθήσομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἠκούσθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἤκουσμαι[Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἀκήκουσμαι is uncertain in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: pluperfect ἤκουστο[Refs 4th c.BC+], (παρ-) [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—hear, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: properly with accusative of thing heard, genitive of person from whom it is heard, ταῦτα Καλυψοῦς ἤκουσα[Refs…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀκούω

akouo

a primary verb; to hear (in various senses):--give (in the) audience

(of), come (to the ears), (shall) hear(-er, -ken), be noised, be

reported, understand.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀκούω

v.

I hear, listen

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀκούω akouō 428x

some list the future active as a middle deponent, ἀκούσομαι, to hear; to hearken, listen to, Mk. 4:3; Lk. 19:48; to heed, obey, Mt. 18:15; Acts 4:19; to understand, 1 Cor. 14:2; to take in or admit to mental acceptance, Mk. 4:33; Jn. 8:43, 47

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀκούω Root ΑΚΟϜ to hear, Hom., etc. —Construct., properly, c. acc. of thing heard, gen. of pers. from whom it is heard, ταῦτα Καλυψοῦς ἤκουσα Od.; the gen. pers. may be omitted, ἀκήκοας λόγον Soph., or the acc. rei, ἄκουε τοῦ θανόντος id. Soph.:—often however c. gen. rei, to have hearing of a thing.

c. gen. objecti, to hear of, hear tell of, ἀκ. πατρός Od.; so c. acc., Od.:—so, ἀκ. περί τινος.

the pers. from whom the thing is heard takes a prep., ἀκούειν τι ἀπό, ἔκ, παρά, πρός τινος, Il., attic

to know by hearsay, εἴ που ἀκούεις Od.; so Plat., etc.

absol. to hearken, give ear, to begin a proclamation, ἀκούετε λεώι hear, O people.

to listen to, give ear to, Il.

to obey, c. gen., or more rarely c. dat., id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-APS-3S — Verb · aorist · passive · subjunctive · third person · singular
aorist passive subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-APS-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Subjunctive Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

20%having heard

having heard20% · 88×hearing10% · 45×hear9% · 39×i heard7% · 31×heard6% · 28×you have heard4% · 18×he should hear4% · 16×you hear2% · 9×other renderings37% · 161×

435 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 90 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb89%adverbial11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 428 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁράωI see, look uponαὐτόςβλέπωI look, see

ὁArticle the

πᾶςall, the whole, καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, exist

ὅς

ἀκούωI hear, listenπᾶςall, the whole, λόγοςa word, speech,

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theὅτανwhen, whensoeverὡςas, like as, how

οὖςthe ear

ἔχωI have, hold, poὁArticle the

ἀκούωmay be heard428×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

λόγοςa word, speech, μαθητήςa learner, disciπερί

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὐNegβλέπωI look, see

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theοὗτοςὅτιthat, since, bec

ὅτιthat, since, because

εἶπονI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,πολύςmuch, many, ofteσυζητέωI seek together,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀκούω · 428× in the New Testament

Acts Luke Matthew John Revelation Mark 1 John Hebrews Ephesians Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament23 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

φωνήa sound, noise, voice×λόγοςa word, speech, divine utterance, analogy×οὖςthe ear×βλέπωI look, see×συνίημιI consider, understand×ῥῆμαa thing spoken×ἀρχήruler, beginning×ἀκοήhearing, faculty of hearing, ear×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

שָׁמַעhear80%H8085 · 414 verses

Counted over the 515 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.16c. AD 40

ὅταν οὖν λέγῃ „ἰδεῖν τί καλέσει", ἄκουε ἴσον τῷ, διὰ τί καλέσει καὶ προσκαλέσεται καὶ ἀσπάσεται τούτων ἕκαστον ὁ νοῦς·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.184c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ μὲν ταῦτʼ ἀκούσας θυσίαν προσφέρει τῷ θεῷ κελευσθεὶς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.3c. AD 100

ἀκούσατε, πῶς περὶ τούτου πεφανέρωκαν οἱ ἱερεῖς τοῦ ναοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD

P.Lond. 7 2011Pharbaithos (Arsinoites)244 BC

r Παταικίων Ζήνωνι χαίρειν. ἀκηκόαμεν παρὰ Πύρρου τοὺς αἰπόλους ἀναχωρεῖν. τὸν μὲν οὖν Λιμναῖον ἔφη ἤδη ἀπεληλυθέναι, Δημήτριον δὲ

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59368Memphis (?)242 BC

ϛ ἔτους τινὰ δὲ ἐν τῶι Μεμφίτηι, ἃ εἶχεν Παμῆς καὶ Ἀμεννεύς, οὓς νῦν ἀκούομεν μεταγηγοχέναι εἰς τὸν Ἡρακλεοπολίτην ἄνευ ἡμῶν, Ἀμμώνιος δʼ ὁ οἰκονόμος ἀπαγήοχεν αὐτοὺς καὶ τὰ

P.Grenf. 2 36Pathyris96 BC

ἡμῖν κακὸν ἐποίησεν ἀλλʼ ἐκ τῶν ἐναντίων ἐπιμεμέληται, περὶ ὧν, ἐὰν αἱρῆτε, γράψατέ μοι. ἠκούσαμεν τὸν μῦν καταβεβρωκέναι τὸν σπόρον. καλῶς ἡμῖν ὦδε, ἢ ἐν Διοσπόλει ἐὰν αἱρῆσθε, πυρὸν

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

ἐνen in G1722 Preposition ¶

2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.

Tyndale gloss

in/on/among

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

79%in

in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg

ἐγώ

μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς

ἐνin2743×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theμένωI remain, abide

σύ

εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existὁArticle the

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μένωI remain, abide×ἱερόςa temple×συναγωγήan assembly, congregation, synagogue×μέσοςmiddle, in the middle×ἔρημοςdeserted, desolate, a desert×

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

σοὶsu you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · dative · singular ¶

2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.

Tyndale gloss

you

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-2DS — Personal pronoun · second person · dative · singular
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2DS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Dative Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

78%you

you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg

ἐν

ὁArticle theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein

πρός

ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de

σύyou2892×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐν

ἐν

ὁArticle theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament

Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀμήνHebr×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַתָּ֫האָ֑תָּה pron. 2 s. m. thou H859b אתי, i.e. אתִּי, th66%H859 · 301 verses

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

ἔτι,eti any longer, G2089 Adverb ¶

93× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Still means something is ongoing or continues to happen, as seen in Mark 5:35 and 1 Corinthians 3:3. It can also mean yet or even, showing something is happening at the present time or will happen in the future.

Tyndale gloss

still

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔτι (eti) is an adverb meaning 'yet,' 'still,' or 'even now.' It covers various temporal aspects—present, past, and future—as well as degrees of comparison. In the New Testament, it appears in verses like Mark 5:35 and 1 Corinthians 3:3. The entries indicate its use with negatives to mean 'no longer' and in comparative phrases to enhance meaning.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔτι

adv.,

yet, as yet, still;

of time;

of the present (adhuc): Mk 5:35, I Co 3:3 15:17, Ga 1:10, al.;

of the past, mostly c. impf.: Mt 12:46, Lk 8:49 15:20, Jo 20:1, Ac 9:1, Ro 5:6, 8, II Th 2:5, He 7:10 9:8, al.;

of the future: Lk 1:15, II Co 1:10;

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔτι, adv., as yet, yet, still; 1. of time; a. ofa thing which went on formerly, whereas now a different state of things exists or has begun to exist: arded Ve 4 ἑτοιμάζω to ἃ ptep., Mt. xxvii. 63; Lk. xxiv. 6, 44: Acts ix. 1; xviii. 18; 2 Th. ii. 5; with gen. absol.: ἔτι (δὲ) αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος, Mt. xii. 46; xvil. 5; xxvi. 47; Mk. xiv. 43; Lk. viii. 49; xxii. 47; add, Lk. ix. 42; xxiv. 41; Jn. xx. 1; Acts x. 44; Ro. v. 8; Heb. ix. 8; with a finite verb, Heb. vii. 10; transposed so as to stand at the beginning of a sentence: ἔτι yap Χριστὸς ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθ. . . . ἀπέGave, Ro. v. 6; cf. W. § 61, 5 p. 553 (515); [B. 389 (333)]; with another notation of time, so that it may be trans. even (cf. Lat. jam) : ἔτι ἐκ κοιλίας μητρός, Lk. i. 15 (ἔτι ἐκ Bpépeos, Anthol. 9, 567,1; ἔτι am ἀρχῆς, Plut. consol. ad Apoll. 6 p. 104 d.). ὍὌ. of a thing which continues at present, even now: Mk. viii. 17 RG…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔτι. P Lond 42% (B.c. 168) (=I. p. 30, Selections, p. 10) ὡς ἔτ[ι] σοῦ παρ[όν]τος πάντων ἐπεδεόμην, “ while you were still at home, I went short altogether.’’ In 26. 55 we have— ἔτι δὲ καὶ “Qpov τοῦ τὴν ἐπιστολὴν παρακεκομικό[το]ς ἀπηγγελκότος κτὰλ., “᾿ἀπα now that Horus who brought the letter has told’’ etc.: cf. P Ryl II. 1459 (A.p. 38) ἔτι καὶ μὴ ἀρκ[εσ]θείς. P Oxy IV. 7448 (B.c. 1) (= Selections, p- 32) shows a common phrase γίνωσκε ὡς ἔτι καὶ viv ἐν ᾿Αλεξανδρέᾳ (1. —Spela) σμέν (/. ἐσμέν) : cf. P Hib I. 46% (B.c. 258) ἔτι οὖν καὶ νῦν ἢ τὸ ἀργύριον εἰσάγετε ἢ KTA., “‘now therefore at length either collect the money, or,” εἴς.» Revillout 2761. p. 295% (B.c. 131-0) (= Witkowski’, p. 96) ἔτι kal νῦν καλῶς ποιήσεις παρακαλῶν σαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς παρ᾽ ἡμῶν, P Oxy VIII. τατι 13 (a.p. 203) ὃν δηλ(ῶ) τετελ(ευτηκέναι) ἔτι πάλαι, ‘whom I declare to have died long ago.” For the adv. used of degree…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔτι (eti) — still.

ἔτι [ῐ],

adverb:

I. of Time,

I.1. of the Present, yet, still, ἔ. μοι μένος ἔμπεδον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔτ᾽ ἐκ βρέφεος ever since babyhood, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔ. καὶ ἐκ παρόντων variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. of the Past, mostly with imperfect, ἀήθεσσον γὰρ ἔτ᾽ αὐτῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with aorist, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. πρότερον, πρόσθεν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with the sense, already, γεγονέναι ἔ. οὐχ ἧττον ἢ εἶναι [Refs]

I.3. of the Future, yet, longer, ἄλγε᾽ ἔδωκεν.. ἠδ᾽ ἔ. δώσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; hereafter, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.4. with a negative, no longer, οὐδὲ.. ἔ. παρέμειναν [Refs 1st c.BC+]; see at {οὐκέτι},{μηκέτι}.

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔτι

eti

perhaps akin to 2094; "yet," still (of time or degree):--after that,

also, ever, (any) further, (t-)henceforth (more), hereafter, (any)

longer, (any) more(-one), now, still, yet.

see GREEK for 2094

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔτι

Adv

still, yet, even now

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔτι eti 93x

yet, still, Mt. 12:46; still, further, longer, Lk. 16:2; further, besides, in addition, Mt. 18:16; with a compar. yet, still, Phil. 1:9

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔτι

of Time,

of the Present, yet, as yet, still, Lat. adhuc, Il., attic; cf. οὐκέτι.

of the Past, mostly with imperf., ἀήθεσσον γὰρ ἔτι they were yet unaccustomed, Il.; προορωμένοις ἔτι Thuc.

of the Future, yet, further, ἄλγε᾽ ἔδωκεν, ἠδ᾽ ἔτι δώσει Il.:—also hereafter, Aesch., Soph.

of Degree, yet, still, besides, further, moreover, Lat. praeterea, insuper, Hom., etc.; ἔτι δέ and besides, nay more, Thuc.

often to strengthen a comp., ἔτι μᾶλλον yet more, Il.; μᾶλλον ἔτι Od.; ἔτι πλέον Hdt., etc.

with the posit., ἔτι ἄνω yet higher up, Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

36%still

still36% · 34×yet21% · 20×any longer16% · 15×any more6% · 6×more4% · 4×while4% · 4×while still2% · 2×anymore2% · 2×other renderings8% · 8×

95 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial91%object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 93 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

σύ

ἐνμετάλαλέωI speak, say

τίςIrg

λέγωI say, speakφυλάσσωI keep, guard, oβλασφημέωI speak evil aga

εἰμίI am, exist

οὐNegἀλλάbut, except

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐπιτάσσωI give order, coμέγαςὅτιthat, since, bec

ὅτιthat, since, because

λέγωI say, speakθεόςGod, a godμνημονεύωI remember, make

ἔτιany longer,93×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theφωνήa sound, noise, γράφωI write

αὐτός

λαλέωI speak, sayπόρρωComp

δέbut, on the other ha

προσέρχομαιI come near, conαὐτόςἀπιστέωI am unfaithful,

εἰμίI am, exist

ἐνσύνεἰς

γάρfor

Χριστόςanointed, the Meσαρκικόςfleshly, carnalἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔτι · 93× in the New Testament

Revelation Luke Hebrews John Matthew Romans Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Galatians 2 Corinthians 2 Thessalonians

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

λαλέωI speak, say×τίςIrg×μικρόςlittle, small×οὐδέNeg×χρείαneed, necessity, business×ἅγιοςset apart, holy, sacred×δύναμαιI am powerful, am able×ἔτιstill, yet, even now×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

עוֹדand (14 t.) עֹד subst. a going round, continuance, b72%H5750 · 199 verses

Counted over the 276 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 18c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὥσπερ ἐν κηρῷ τῇ ἑαυτοῦ ψυχῇ τοὺς ἑκάστων δεξάμενος τύπους ἀγαλματοφορεῖ νοητὴν πόλιν, ἧς ἀνακινήσας τὰ εἴδωλα μνήμῃ τῇ συμφύτῳ καὶ τοὺς χαρακτῆρας ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐνσφραγισάμενος, οἷα δημιουργὸς ἀγαθός, ἀποβλέπων εἰς τὸ παράδειγμα τὴν ἐκ λίθων καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.9c. AD 75–95

τούτῳ δὴ πειθόμενος ὡς αἰεὶ τοῖς χρήσιμον ἢ καλόν τι πράττειν δυναμένοις συμφιλοκαλοῦντι καὶ ἐμαυτὸν αἰσχυνόμενος, εἰ δόξαιμι ῥαθυμίᾳ πλέον ἢ τῷ περὶ τὰ κάλλιστα χαίρειν πόνῳ, προθυμότερον ἐπερρώσθην, ἔτι κἀκεῖνα πρὸς τοῖς εἰρημένοις λογισάμενος οὐ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.5c. AD 100

τότε βοήσεις, καὶ ὁ θεὸς ἐπακούσεταί σου, ἔτι λαλοῦντός σου ἐρεῖ: Ἰδοὺ πάρειμι: ἐὰν ἀφέλῃς ἀπὸ σοῦ σύνδεσμον καὶ χειροτονίαν καὶ ῥῆμα γογγυσμοῦ, καὶ δῷς πεινῶντι τὸν ἄρτον σου ἐκ ψυχῆς σου καὶ ψυχὴν τεταπεινωμένην ἐλεήσῃς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC

P.Edg. $1Philadelphia (Arsinoites)242 BC

εἰ μὲν οὖν διείλεξαι τῶι Κράτωνι καὶ ὑπακήκοε, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι· εἰ δὲ μή, ἔτι καὶ νῦν μὴ παρέργως αὐτὸ ποιήσας, ὅπως μὴ συμβῇ ἀναπληρουμένης τῆς ὠνῆς προεισπραχθέντα τὸν

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59368Memphis (?)242 BC

σμηνῶν … τὸ ἀντίγραφον ὑπογέγραφα ε … … τὸ παρʼ ἡμῶν ὑπόμνημα … μὴ ἔτι καὶ νῦν ὁ Ἀμμώνιος ἐξευδοκῆι ὑμᾶς καὶ π … … καὶ τῶν σμηνῶν, τούς

Archiv für Papyrusforschung (AfP) 2 (1903), p. 517-518Pathyris131 BC

πλειονάκις σοι γράφω περὶ τοῦ διανδραγαθήσαντα σαυτοῦ ἐπιμέλεσθαι μέχρι τοῦ τὰ πράγματα ἀποκαταστῆναι , ἔτι καὶ νῦν καλῶς ποιήσεις παρακαλῶν σαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς παρʼ ἡμῶν· προσπέπτωκεν γὰρ Παῶν ἀναπλεῖν

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

ὅτιhoti for G3754 Conjunction ¶

1,293× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'that' or 'because', used to introduce a reason or explanation. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 3:9 and Romans 8:38. It helps to show cause and effect in sentences.

Tyndale gloss

that/since: that

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὅτι (hoti) is a conjunction primarily meaning 'that' or 'because.' It introduces objective clauses, often following verbs of perception or declaration, and can also serve as a causal particle. The New Testament frequently employs it in this way, such as in Matthew 5:4-12. There is some variation in how lexicons describe its usage, particularly regarding its pleonastic function in direct discourse.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅτι,

conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις).

As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that;

after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mt 3:9 6:32 11:25, Mk 3:28, Lk 2:49, Jo 2:22, Ac 4:13, Ro 1:13 8:38 10:9, Phl 4:15, Ja 2:24, al.; elliptically, Jo 6:46, Phl 3:12, al.

After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or pers. pron., Jo 3:19 16:19, Ro 9:6, I Jo 3:16 al.; c. pron. interrog., Mt 8:27, Mk 4:41,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅτι [properly neut. of ὅστις], a conjunction [fr. Hom. down], (Lat. quod [ef. W. § 53,8 b.; B. § 139, 51; § 149, 87), marking I. the substance or contents (of a statement), that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring (where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.) : ἀναγγέλλειν, Acts xiv. 27; διηγεῖσθαι, Acts ix. 273; εἰπεῖν, Mt. xvi. 20; xxviii. 7,13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; 1Co.i.15; λέγειν, Mt. iii. 9; vill. 11; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv.7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv. 9 [T Tr WH om. L br. ὅτι}; ix. 2, and very often; προεἰρηκέναι, 2 Co. vii. 3; before the ὅτι in Acts xiv. 22 supply λέγοντες, contained in the preceding παρακαλοῦντες [ef. B. §151, 11]; ὅτι after γράφειν, 1 Co. ix.10; 1 Jn. 11. 12-14; μαρτυρεῖν, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. i. 34; iii. 28; iv. 44; ὁμολογεῖν, Heb. xi. 13; δεικνύειν, Mt. xvi. 21; δηλοῦν, 1 Co. i. 11; διδάσκειν, 1 Co. xi. 14. after ἐμφανίζειν. Heb. xi. 14; δῆλον (ἐστίν), 1 Co.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οτι. (1) For ὅτι, ‘‘that,” introducing an objective clause after verbs of knowing, saying, etc., cf. P Tebt II. 4098 (A.D. 5) εἰδὼ[ς ὅ]τι ἐξίι)ουσίαν αὐτῶν ἔχει kal Λυσίμαχος kal σύ, ΚΕ knew that both you and Lysimachus had plenty of them” (Edd.), P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) νομίσας ὅτι (cf. Mt 517) κιχρᾷς por αὐτούς, ““ consider that you are lending them (sc. staters) to me’’ (Edd.), BGU III. 8464* (ii/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 93) γεινώσκειν σαι θέλω, ὅτι οὐχ [HA] Lov, ὅτι ἀναβένις (1. ἀναβαίνεις) els τὴν μητρόπολιν, “1 wish you to know that I had no hope that you were coming up to the metropolis,” 74.9 αἴγραψά σοι, ὅτι γυμνός εἰμει, “1 wrote you that I am naked,” and P Tebt II. 420+ (iii/A.D.) οἴδατε ὅτι ἀπὸ ζημίας ἠμί, ‘‘ You know that I am blameless.” Ὅτι, however, is frequently omitted, e.g. BGU IIL. 8153(ii/a.p.) γεινόσκιν σε θέλω [τὴ]ν ἐπιστολήν σου ἔλαβε (corrected by another hand…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅτι (hoti) — that/since: that.

ὅτῐ,

Epic dialect ὅττῐ (both in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: conjunction, to introduce an objective clause, that, after Verbs of seeing or knowing, thinking or saying; in [Refs 8th c.BC+] —Usage:

I. when ὅτι introduces a statement of fact:

I. a in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always with indicative, the tense following the same rules as in English, ἤγγειλ᾽ ὅττι ῥά οἱ πόσις ἔκτοθι μίμνε πυλάων [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I. b in Attic dialect, ὅτι takes indicative after primary tenses, indicative or optative after secondary tenses, e.g. ἐνδείκνυμαι ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι σοφός [Refs 5th c.BC+] news came that Megara had (literal has) revolted, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes optative and indicative are found in the same sentence, ἔλεγον, ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, Ἀριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς.. εἴη [Refs 5th c.BC+].. and the accusative with infinitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅτι

hoti

neuter of 3748 as conjunction; demonstrative, that (sometimes

redundant); causative, because:--as concerning that, as though,

because (that), for (that), how (that), (in) that, though, why.

see GREEK for 3748

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅτι

Cj.

that, since, because

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅτι hoti 1x

originally was the neuter of ὅστις, that, Mt. 2:16, 22, 23; 6:5, 16; often used pleonastically in reciting another’s words, Mt. 9:18; Lk. 19:42; Acts 5:23; as a causal particle, for that, for, because, Mt. 2:18; 5:3, 4, 5; 13:13; because, seeing that, since, Lk. 23:40; Acts 1:17

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.

In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%that

that64% · 856×because19% · 252×for16% · 209×other renderings1% · 12×

1,329 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,293 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

σύ

λέγωI say, speakγάρforδέbut, on the othe

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςσύδέbut, on the othe

οἶδαI know, remember

οὐNegκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakμαθητήςa learner, disciπερί

γινώσκωI come to know, lear

οὗτοςκαίand, even, also,αὐτός

ὅτιfor1293×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπατήρfather, Father,

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existοἶδαI know, rememberδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ἐγώ

εἰμίI am, existοὐNegὁArticle the

οὗτος

εἰμίI am, existὁArticle theποιέωI do, make

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theῥῆμαa thing spokenζητέωI seek, search f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅτι · 1,293× in the New Testament

John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 John Revelation 1 Corinthians Romans 2 Corinthians Galatians Philippians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

οἶδαI know, remember×γινώσκωI come to know, learn, realize×ἀμήνHebr×μαρτυρέωI witness, testify×δοκέωI think, seem, appear, it seems×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 8c. AD 40

Μωυσῆς δὲ καὶ φιλοσοφίας ἐπ’ αὐτὴν φθάσας ἀκρότητα καὶ χρησμοῖς τὰ πολλὰ καὶ συνεκτικώτατα τῶν τῆς φύσεως ἀναδιδαχθεὶς ἔγνω δή, ὅτι ἀναγκαιότατόν ἐστιν ἐν τοῖς οὖσι τὸ μὲν εἶναι δραστήριον αἴτιον, τὸ δὲ παθητόν, καὶ ὅτι τὸ μὲν δραστήριον ὁ τῶν ὅλων…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

C.Erbstreit14Diospolis Magna (Theben)187 BC

καὶ τὴν εἰκοστὴν τοῦ ἐγκυκλίου καὶ τὰ ἄλλα τὰ καθήκοντα. … ται Προῖτος, καθʼ ὅτι πρόκειται … ἑξήκοντα ἓξ τετρωβόλου καὶ τῆς … … τοπογραμματέως τοῦ Παθυρίτου … ἀρουρῶν

P.Grenf. 1 10 p. 24Hermonthis149 BC

ι τοῖς ἐνκαλουμένοις τὸ ἀντίγραφον τῆς ἐντεύξεως λαβεῖν παρ … τ … … πίστιν ὅτι ἀπαντησα … ἐπὶ τὸ ἐν τῆι αὐλῆι κριτήριον ἐν ἡμέραις λ οὐκ ο

P.Bour. 10Pathyris89 BC

δʼ ἐπιχειροῦντας μὴ ὑπακούειν σου … υτέραι στάσει ἐχομένους ἀσφαλισάμενος μέχρι τοῦ καὶ ἡμᾶς ὅτι τάχος ἐπιβαλεῖν πρὸς σέ. ἔρρωσοἔρρωσο ἔτους κϛ Φαμενὼθ ιϛ

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

οἱho the G3588 Article · nominative · plural · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NPM — Article · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

ἔμποροίemporos merchants G1713 Noun · nominative · plural · masculine ¶

5× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means a merchant or trader, someone who buys and sells goods. In Matthew 13:45, it describes a merchant who is looking for valuable pearls. It is about someone who makes a living by trading goods.

Amplified meaning

traders, businessmen

Tyndale gloss

trader/merchant

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔμπορος (transliterated as emporos) is derived from the roots meaning 'in' and 'journey.' It refers to a merchant or trader, specifically one who travels for trade, and can also denote a passenger on a ship. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts related to commerce, notably in Matthew 13:45 and Revelation 18:3, 11, 15, 23.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔμ-πορος, -ου, ὁ

(< πόρος, a journey),

[in LXX chiefly for סָחַר, רָכַל ;]

a passenger on shipboard, one on a journey.

a merchant: Mt 13:45, Re 18:3, 11 ,15, 23.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔμ-πορος [see ἐν, III. 3], -ov, 6, (πόρος) ; ΠΝ αν ὁ ἐπ᾽ ἀλλοτρίας νεὼς πλέων μισθοῦ, ὁ ἐπιβάτης ; so Hesych., with whom agree Phavorinus and the Schol. ad Arstph. Plut. 521; and so the word is used by Homer. 2. after Hom. one on a journey, whether by sea or by land, esp. for traffic; henee 3. a merchant, (opp. to κάπηλος a retailer, petty tradesman): Rev. xviii. 3, 11, 15, 23; ἄνθρωπος ἔμπορος (see ἄνθρωπος, 4 a.), Mt. xiii. 45 [WII txt. om. dvOp.]. (Sept. for 7d and 554.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔμπορος. In BGU III. tor (ii/B.c.) we have a letter addressed to Antaeus παρὰ Μαρρέου[ς τ]οῦ Iler[o]oe(pios ἐμπόρου, and in 7d, IV. 1061! (B.c. 14) an attack is made ληστρικῶι τρόπωι ἐπί τινα ἔμπορον τῶν ἐκ Tod ᾿Οξυρυγχίτου. P Oxy I. 361-9 (ii/ili A.D.) provides that if the tax-farmer desires that a ship be unloaded—!8™. ὃ ἔμπορος ἐκφορτιζέτ]ω, ‘the merchant shall unload it,” but that if the ship’s ‘‘ manifest”’ be found correct—6 τελώνης τὴ]ν δαπάνην τῷ ἐμπόρ]ῳ τοῦ ἐκφορτισμοῦ ἀποδ[ότ]ω, ‘the tax-farmer shall repay to the merchant the cost of unloading.” Add Prezsigke 1070 τὸ προσκύνημα “Hpaxdel[Sjov Mevepev.adttos ἐμπόρου παρὰ τῷ θ[εἸῷ κυρί[ῳ Βησᾷ. For ἔμπορος in its primitive sense of vzator Herwerden (Lex. s.v.) cites Bacchyl. xvii. 36 ἔμπορον οἷ᾽ ἀλάταν ἐπ᾽ ἀλλοδαμίαν, “like a wayfarer who wanders forth toastrange folk” (Jebb) : cf. Caguat 1V. 14419 (Cyzicus, i/A.D.) τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔμπορος (emporos) — trader/merchant.

ἔμπορ-ος, ον,

one who goes on ship-board as a passenger, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. = ὁ ἐν πόρῳ ὤν, wayfarer, traveller, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

III. merchant, trader, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; distinguished from the retail-dealer (κάπηλος) by his making voyages and importing goods himself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. βίου a trafficker in life, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὥρης ἔ. a dealer in beauty, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

III.2. as adjective, ={ἐμπορικός, ναῦς ἔ}. [Refs 1st c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔμπορος

emporos

from 1722 and the base of 4198; a (wholesale) tradesman:--merchant.

see GREEK for 1722

see GREEK for 4198

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔμπορος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a merchant, trader

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔμπορος emporos 5x

pr. a passenger by sea; a traveller; one who travels about for traffic, a merchant, Mt. 13:45; Rev. 18:3, 11, 15, 23*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔμπορος ἔμ-πορος, ον adje)m-por os_on ἐν, πόρος, cf. περάω one who goes on shipboard as a passenger, Lat. vector, Od.

= ὁ ἐν πόρῳ ὤν, any one on a journey, a traveller, wanderer, Trag.

a merchant, trader, Lat. mercator, Hdt., etc.:—metaph., ἔμπορος βίου a trafficker in life, Eur.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NPM — Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

80%merchants

merchants80% · 4×merchant20% · 1×

5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject80%adverbial20%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaven

ὁArticle the

ἔμποροςmerchants5×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

γῆthe earth, soil,

ζητέωI seek, search for,

καλόςbeautiful, good,

οὗτος

ὁArticle the

σύ

εἰμίI am, exist

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔμπορος · 5× in the New Testament

Revelation Matthew

Across the New Testament2 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

γῆthe earth, soil, land×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

סָחַרgo around, about, travel about in56%H5503 · 9 verses רָכַל31%H7402 · 5 verses כֶּ֫סֶףsilver, money25%H3701 · 4 verses

Counted over the 16 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Sacrifices of Abel and Cain 116c. AD 40

καὶ εἴ τις ἔμπορος ἢ ναύκληρος θαλαττεύων ἐπαλλήλοις κακοπραγίαις χρῆται, μετατραπόμενος ἠρεμείτω·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 20.34c. AD 75–95

Καθʼ ὃν δὲ χρόνον ὁ Ἰζάτης ἐν τῷ Σπασίνου χάρακι διέτριβεν Ἰουδαῖός τις ἔμπορος Ἀνανίας ὄνομα πρὸς τὰς γυναῖκας εἰσιὼν τοῦ βασιλέως ἐδίδασκεν αὐτὰς τὸν θεὸν σέβειν, ὡς Ἰουδαίοις πάτριον ἦν,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

1st c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC

CdÉ 12 (1937), p. 281-Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 47

ὀκτὼ καὶ εἰς τὸ δημόσιον τὰς ἴσας, καὶ ἐὰν δέ τις αὐτῶν εὑρεθῇ πεπρακὼς ἐμπόρῳ πλείω στατῆρος ἁλὸς ζημιούσθω ὁ τοιοῦτος εἰς τὸ κοινὸν ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ὀκτὼ καὶ εἰς

O.Berenike 1 94BerenikeAD 26–AD 75

Πλούταρχος Ἀμμωνίου ἔμπορος· πάρες Παυσείριος Ὥρου οἴνου ἰταλικὰ δέκα καὶ λαδικηνὰ οἴνου δέκα , ἐλαίου ἡμικάδια δέκα

P.Eirene 3 2 VoArsinoitesAD 87

ἀντιφώνησιν διὰ Νεμεσᾶτος τοῦ Μύσθου ἀνθ’ οὗ Εἰκᾶ δι’ οὗ δέδωκέ μοι Ἡρακλᾶς ὁ ἔμπορος χαλκόν. πέμψεις δὲ καί σύ χαλκόν· οὐκ ἔχομεν ὄξος οὐδὲ ὁλόφακον. πέμψεις οὖν ἡμῖν,

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

σουsu of you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · singular ¶

2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.

Tyndale gloss

you

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-2GS — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · singular
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

78%you

you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg

ἐν

ὁArticle theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein

πρός

ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de

σύof you2892×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐν

ἐν

ὁArticle theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament

Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀμήνHebr×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַתָּ֫האָ֑תָּה pron. 2 s. m. thou H859b אתי, i.e. אתִּי, th66%H859 · 301 verses

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

ἦσανeimi were G1510 Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · plural ¶

2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.

Tyndale gloss

to be

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-IAI-3P — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · plural
imperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-IAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

26%is

is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς

οὗτος

ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god

ἐγώ

ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά

σύ

ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός

εἰμίwere2457×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὐNegγάρfor

ἐν

ὁArticle theσύαὐτός

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t

ἐγώ

εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament

John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἄξιοςworthy, worthy of, deserving×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

οἱho the G3588 Article · nominative · plural · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NPM — Article · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

μεγιστᾶνεςmegistan great ones G3175 Noun · nominative · plural · masculine ¶

3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The term for great men or nobles, like in Mark 6:21, describing important people in society. These are individuals with high status or authority, often used to refer to leaders or wealthy individuals.

Amplified meaning

nobles, magnates

Tyndale gloss

great man

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μεγιστάν is a plural noun meaning 'great men' or 'nobles,' derived from μέγιστος (greatest). It appears in contexts referring to chief men or lords, notably in Mark 6:21 and Revelation 6:15, 18:23. The word is used in the Septuagint to translate terms for leaders or nobles in Hebrew texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† μεγιστάν, -ᾶνος, ὁ

(< μέγιστος),

[in LXX chiefly for שַׂר, Je 24:8, al.; רַבְרְבָן, Da LXX TH 5:23, al.; freq. in Sir (sing., Si 4:7);]

usually pl., οἱ μ.,

the chief men, nobles (Manetho, FlJ, al.): Mk 6:21, Re 6:15 18:23.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μεγιστάν, -avos, 6, (fr. μέγιστος, as veav fr. νέος, ξυνάν fr. vos), a later Grk. word (see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 196), once in sing. Sir. iv. 7; commonly in plur. οἱ μεγιστᾶνες, the grandees, magnates, nobles, chief men of a city or a people, the associates or courtiers of a king, (Vulg. principes) : Rev. vi. 15; τῆς γῆς, xviii. 23; τοῦ Ἡρώδου, Mk. vi. 21. (Sept. for oN, Jer. xiv. 3; Nah. ii. 6; Zech. xi. 2; 0°9§73, Jon. iii. 7; Nah. iii.10; y»2737, Dan. Theodot. iv. 33, ete. ; oq, Is. xxxiv. 12; Jer. xxiv. 8, etc.; 1 Mace. ix. 37; often in Sir. Manetho 4, 41; Joseph., Artem. In Lat. megistanes, Tac. ann. 15, 27; Suet. Calig. 5.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μεγιστάν. This late Greek word = ‘‘a great one,” “" (Lob. Phryn. p. 196f., Sturz Dial. Mac. p. Part V, a courtier,” 180 ff.), is

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μεγιστάν (megistan) — great man.

μεγιστάν, ᾶνος, ὁ,

great man, grandee, [LXX+4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

μεγιστάν

megistanes

plural from 3176; grandees:--great men, lords.

see GREEK for 3176

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μεγιστάν, ᾶνος, ὁ

n.m.

a great one, a lord

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μεγιστάν megistan 3x

great men, lords, chiefs, nobles, princes, Mk. 6:21; Rev. 6:15; 18:23*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μεγιστᾶνες μέγιστος great men, grandees, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NPM-S — Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NPM-S Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine Degree: Superlative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

67%great ones

great ones67% · 2×great men33% · 1×

3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

indirect object33%subject33%predicate33%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ποιέωI do, makeκαίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, exist

μεγιστάνgreat ones3×

what comes after →

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle the

γῆthe earth, soil,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμεγιστάν · 3× in the New Testament

Revelation Mark

Across the New Testament2 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

γῆthe earth, soil, land×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

מֶ֫לֶךְking42%H4428 · 6 verses שַׂרchieftain, chief, ruler, official, captain, prince35%H8269 · 5 verses גָּדוֹלgreat28%H1419 · 4 verses

Counted over the 14 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 20.76c. AD 75–95

γίνεται δʼ ἡ πρᾶξις αὐτῶν κατάφωρος τοῖς ὑπηκόοις, κἀπὶ τούτῳ χαλεπήναντες οἱ μεγιστᾶνες οὐκ ἐφανέρουν μὲν τὴν ὀργήν, κατὰ νοῦν δὲ ἔχοντες καιρὸν ἐπιτήδειον ἐζήτουν δίκην εἰσπράξασθαι σπεύδοντες παρʼ αὐτῶν.

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

τῆςho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁof the19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

γῆς,gē earth, G1093 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine ¶

250× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for earth or ground, referring to soil, a region, or the entire globe, as seen in Luke 21:35 and Acts 1:8.

Amplified meaning

world, globe

Tyndale gloss

earth: soil

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word γῆ (gē) means 'earth' or 'land' and is used in various contexts, including the physical ground, cultivated land, and regions or countries. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often contrasting with 'heaven' or 'sea.' The lexicons indicate a consensus on its meanings, which encompass both the solid part of the globe and the concept of territory.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

γῆ, γῆς, ἡ,

[in LXX for אֶרֶץ, אֲדָמָה, etc.;]

the earth, world: Lk 21:35, Ac 1:8, He 11:13, Re 3:10, al.; opp. to οὐρανός, Mt 5:18 11:25, Mk 13:27, al.

land;

opp. to sea or water: Mk 4:1, Lk 5:3, Jo 6:21, al.;

as subject to cultivation: Mt 13:5, Mk 4:8, Lk 13:7,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γῆ; gen. γῆς, 7, (contr. fr. yéa, poet. γαῖα), Sept. very often for γι and ΤΣ, earth; 1. arable land: Mt. xiii. 5, 8, 23; Mk. iv. 8, 20, 26, 28, 31; Lk. xiii. 7; xiv. 35 (34); Jn. xii. 24; Heb. vi. 7; Jas. v. 7; Rev. ix. 4; of the earthy material out of which a thing is formed, with the implied idea of frailty and weakness: ἐκ γῆς χοϊκός, 1 Co. xv. 47. 2. the ground, the earth as a standing-place, (Germ. Boden) : Mt. x. 29; xv. 35; xxiii. 85; xxvii. 51; Mk. viii. 6; ix. 20; xiv. 35; Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; xxiv. 5; Jn. viii. 6, 8, [i.e Rec.]; Acts ix. 4, 8. 3. the main /and, opp. to sea or water: Mk. iv. 1; vi. 47; Lk. ν. 8; viii. 27; Jn. vi. 21; xxi. 8 sq. 11; Rev. xii. 12. 4. the earth as a whole, the world (Lat. terrarum orbis); a. the earth as opp. to the heavens: Mt. v. 18, 35; vi.10; xvi.19; xviii. 18; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 31; Lk. ii. 14; Jn. xii. 32; Acts ii. 19…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

γῆ. The rare plural forms of this word which are found in the LXX may be illustrated from the Ptolemaic papyri of 1i/B.c., e.g. BGU III. 993329 (νος 128-7) γῶν τε καὶ οἰκιῶν, P Tor I. 12° (B.c. 116) ἕνεκεν τοῦ kal τῶν γῶν μὴ μετεσχηκέναι αὐτήν, P Tebt I. 6% (B.c. 140-39) yas τε καὶ ἕτερα : see Thackeray G7. i. p. 143. In MGr, beside ἢ γῆ, we have the indeclinable ἢ γῆς, τῆς γῆς, etc. : see Thumb Handbook, p. 57. The familiar Biblical ἔπὶ γῆς appears in P Ryl 11. $78 (early iii/A.b.) 6 αὐτὸς ὁριοδείκτης ἐπέδειξα ἐπὶ γῆς (restored from 1.*), “1 the said surveyor have verified it on the spot”: the editors suggest that ἐπὶ γῆς should be read in P Thead 54% and 55%. It may be observed that γῆ in papyri is regularly ‘‘land” in small or moderate quantities, a sense never found in NT, where γῆ is always antithetic to sky or sea, or denotes a district or country, The LXX and papyri, in their use…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γῆ (gē) — earth: planet.

γῆ, ἡ,

occasionally in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: dual γαῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; γῶν [Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—earth (including land and sea, [Refs 7th c.BC+] opposed to heaven, or land opposed to sea, Γῆ τε καὶ Ἠέλιος καὶ Ἐρινύες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τίς γ; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κατὰ γῆν on land, by land, opposed to ναυσί, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to ἐκ θαλάσσης, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ γῆς on earth, opposed to νέρθε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ γῆς below the earth, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: genitive with local Adverbs, ἵνα γῆς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ποῦ, ποῖ, ὅποι γ., [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. earth, as an element, [Refs 6th c.BC+]

2. b γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ αἰτεῖν, as tokens of submission, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

γῆ

ge

contracted from a primary word; soil; by extension a region, or the

solid part or the whole of the terrene globe (including the occupants

in each application):--country, earth(-ly), ground, land, world.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γῆ, γῆς, ἡ

n.f.

the earth, soil, land

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γῆ gē 250x

earth, soil, Mt. 13:5; Mk. 4:8, et al.; the ground, surface of the earth, Mt. 10:29; Lk. 6:49, et al.; the land, as opposed to the sea or a lake, Lk. 5:11; Jn. 21:8, 9, 11; the earth, world, Mt. 5:18, 35, et al.; by synec. the inhabitants of the earth, Mt. 5:13; 6:10; 10:34; a land, region, tract, country, territory, Mt. 2:20; 14:34;by way of eminence, the chosen land, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

γῆ earth opp. to heaven, or land opp. to sea, Hom., etc.; κατὰ γῆν on land, by land, Thuc.; κατὰ γῆς Xen.:— ἐπὶ γῆς on earth, Soph.; κατὰ γῆς below the earth, Trag.:—the gen. with local adverbs, ἵνα γῆς, ποῦ γῆς, ubi terrarum, where in (in what quarter of) the world, where on earth, Soph., etc.

earth, as an element, opp. to air, water, fire, Plat.

a land, country, Aesch., etc.; γῆν πρὸ γῆς from land to land, id. Aesch.

the earth or ground as tilled, Soph., Plat.

a lump of earth, in the phrase γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ αἰτεῖν, γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ διδόναι, in token of submission, Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

urth ('adhamah, 'erets, 'aphar; ge, oikoumene):

In a hilly limestone country like Palestine, the small amount of iron oxide in the rocks tends to be oxidized, and thereby to give a prevailing reddish color to the soil. This is especially the case on relatively barren hills where there is little organic matter present to prevent reddening and give a more blackish tinge.

'Adhamah (compare 'adham, "a man," and Adam) is from 'adham, "to be red," and is used in the senses: "earth" (Ex 20:24), "land" (Ps 105:35), a "land" or country (Isa 14:2), "ground" (Ge 4:11), "the earth" (Ge 7:4).

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Earth

(1.) In the sense of soil or ground, the translation of the word adamah’. In Gen. 9:20 “husbandman” is literally “man of the ground or earth.” Altars were to be built of earth (Ex. 20:24). Naaman asked for two mules’ burden of earth (2 Kings 5:17), under the superstitious notion that Jehovah, like the gods of the heathen, could be acceptably worshipped only on his own soil.

(2). As the rendering of ’erets, it means the whole world (Gen. 1:2); the land as opposed to the sea (1:10). Erets also denotes a country (21:32); a plot of ground (23:15); the ground on which a man stands (33:3); the inhabitants of the earth (6:1; 11:1); all the world except Israel (

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The term is used in two widely-different senses: (1) for the material of which the earth’s surface is composed; (2) as the name of the planet on which man dwells. The Hebrew language discriminates between these two by the use of separate terms, adamah for the former, erets for the latter. Adamah is the earth in the sense of soil or ground, particularly as being susceptible of cultivation. (Genesis 2:7) Erets is applied in a more or less extended sense-- (1) to the whole world, (Genesis 1:1) (2) to land as opposed to sea, (Genesis 1:10) (3) to a country, (Genesis 21:32) (4) to a plot of ground, (Genesis 23:15) and (5) to…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

In both Hebrew and Greek the same word is used to denote the earth as a whole, and a particular land. Only the context can enable us to decide in which of these senses it is to be taken in a given passage.

Thus in Mt 27:45 we might, so far as the original word is concerned, render either "there was darkness over all the land," or over all the earth. The expression "all the earth" is sometimes used hyperbolically for a large portion of it, Ezr 1:2. The word is used of the whole world, etc. In a moral sense, earthly is opposed to what is heavenly, spiritual and holy, Joh 3:31 1Co 15:47 Col 3:2

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

67%earth

earth67% · 170×land19% · 48×ground7% · 18×soil4% · 11×other renderings3% · 8×

255 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial59%subject18%object15%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 250 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐπίεἰςκαίand, even, also,

καίand, even, also, nam

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaΖαβουλώνPropἔκπαλαιfrom of old, lon

ἐπί

καίand, even, also,εἴτεand if, whetherεἰμίI am, exist

ἐκ

ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἐγώἄνθρωποςa man, one of th

ἐν

πάροικοςa stranger, foreσημεῖονa sign, miracle,παροικίαa sojourning

γῆearth,250×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theἐπίγίνομαιI come into bein

ὁArticle the

καλόςbeautiful, good,ἀγαθόςgoodἔργονwork, labor, act

εἰμίI am, exist

δέωI bindλύωI loose, untie, καίand, even, also,

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὑποπόδιονa footstoolκρύπτωI hide, conceal,ἀποκρύπτωI hide away, con

ἐκ

ὁArticle theὕδωρwater

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceγῆ · 250× in the New Testament

Revelation Matthew Acts Luke Mark John Hebrews James 2 Peter Colossians Ephesians 1 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament14 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἐπί×οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaven×κατοικέωI dwell in, settle in, inhabit×πίπτωI fall, fall under×βασιλεύςa king, ruler, emperor×θάλασσαthe sea, lake×βάλλωI cast, throw, rush, put, place, drop×μήτεNeg×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אֶ֫רֶץn. f. & (seld.) m. earth, land75%H776 · 1305 verses

Counted over the 1,727 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 26c. AD 40

Φησὶ δ’ ὡς „ἐν ἀρχῇ ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν", τὴν ἀρχὴν παραλαμβάνων | οὐχ ὡς οἴονταί τινες τὴν κατὰ χρόνον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.7c. AD 100

λέγει δὲ πάλιν πρὸς αὐτούς: Μὴ ἐγὼ ἐνετειλάμην τοῖς πατράσιν ὑμῶν ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, προσενέγκαι μοι ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ θυσίας;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC 1st c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀδύνατος ὄμμασι τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι περὶ Πάθυριν γῆν ἤπειρον σιτοφόρον ἀρουρῶν … ἧς γείτονες νότουπλατεῖαὁδός, βορρᾶ … περίχωμα … προπεπρα

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

ξ μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἀδιαιρέτου ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ πεδίωι Παθύρεως τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἕβδομον·

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

ὅτιhoti because G3754 Conjunction ¶

1,293× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'that' or 'because', used to introduce a reason or explanation. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 3:9 and Romans 8:38. It helps to show cause and effect in sentences.

Tyndale gloss

that/since: that

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὅτι (hoti) is a conjunction primarily meaning 'that' or 'because.' It introduces objective clauses, often following verbs of perception or declaration, and can also serve as a causal particle. The New Testament frequently employs it in this way, such as in Matthew 5:4-12. There is some variation in how lexicons describe its usage, particularly regarding its pleonastic function in direct discourse.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅτι,

conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις).

As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that;

after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mt 3:9 6:32 11:25, Mk 3:28, Lk 2:49, Jo 2:22, Ac 4:13, Ro 1:13 8:38 10:9, Phl 4:15, Ja 2:24, al.; elliptically, Jo 6:46, Phl 3:12, al.

After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or pers. pron., Jo 3:19 16:19, Ro 9:6, I Jo 3:16 al.; c. pron. interrog., Mt 8:27, Mk 4:41,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅτι [properly neut. of ὅστις], a conjunction [fr. Hom. down], (Lat. quod [ef. W. § 53,8 b.; B. § 139, 51; § 149, 87), marking I. the substance or contents (of a statement), that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring (where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.) : ἀναγγέλλειν, Acts xiv. 27; διηγεῖσθαι, Acts ix. 273; εἰπεῖν, Mt. xvi. 20; xxviii. 7,13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; 1Co.i.15; λέγειν, Mt. iii. 9; vill. 11; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv.7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv. 9 [T Tr WH om. L br. ὅτι}; ix. 2, and very often; προεἰρηκέναι, 2 Co. vii. 3; before the ὅτι in Acts xiv. 22 supply λέγοντες, contained in the preceding παρακαλοῦντες [ef. B. §151, 11]; ὅτι after γράφειν, 1 Co. ix.10; 1 Jn. 11. 12-14; μαρτυρεῖν, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. i. 34; iii. 28; iv. 44; ὁμολογεῖν, Heb. xi. 13; δεικνύειν, Mt. xvi. 21; δηλοῦν, 1 Co. i. 11; διδάσκειν, 1 Co. xi. 14. after ἐμφανίζειν. Heb. xi. 14; δῆλον (ἐστίν), 1 Co.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οτι. (1) For ὅτι, ‘‘that,” introducing an objective clause after verbs of knowing, saying, etc., cf. P Tebt II. 4098 (A.D. 5) εἰδὼ[ς ὅ]τι ἐξίι)ουσίαν αὐτῶν ἔχει kal Λυσίμαχος kal σύ, ΚΕ knew that both you and Lysimachus had plenty of them” (Edd.), P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) νομίσας ὅτι (cf. Mt 517) κιχρᾷς por αὐτούς, ““ consider that you are lending them (sc. staters) to me’’ (Edd.), BGU III. 8464* (ii/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 93) γεινώσκειν σαι θέλω, ὅτι οὐχ [HA] Lov, ὅτι ἀναβένις (1. ἀναβαίνεις) els τὴν μητρόπολιν, “1 wish you to know that I had no hope that you were coming up to the metropolis,” 74.9 αἴγραψά σοι, ὅτι γυμνός εἰμει, “1 wrote you that I am naked,” and P Tebt II. 420+ (iii/A.D.) οἴδατε ὅτι ἀπὸ ζημίας ἠμί, ‘‘ You know that I am blameless.” Ὅτι, however, is frequently omitted, e.g. BGU IIL. 8153(ii/a.p.) γεινόσκιν σε θέλω [τὴ]ν ἐπιστολήν σου ἔλαβε (corrected by another hand…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅτι (hoti) — that/since: that.

ὅτῐ,

Epic dialect ὅττῐ (both in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: conjunction, to introduce an objective clause, that, after Verbs of seeing or knowing, thinking or saying; in [Refs 8th c.BC+] —Usage:

I. when ὅτι introduces a statement of fact:

I. a in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always with indicative, the tense following the same rules as in English, ἤγγειλ᾽ ὅττι ῥά οἱ πόσις ἔκτοθι μίμνε πυλάων [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I. b in Attic dialect, ὅτι takes indicative after primary tenses, indicative or optative after secondary tenses, e.g. ἐνδείκνυμαι ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι σοφός [Refs 5th c.BC+] news came that Megara had (literal has) revolted, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes optative and indicative are found in the same sentence, ἔλεγον, ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, Ἀριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς.. εἴη [Refs 5th c.BC+].. and the accusative with infinitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅτι

hoti

neuter of 3748 as conjunction; demonstrative, that (sometimes

redundant); causative, because:--as concerning that, as though,

because (that), for (that), how (that), (in) that, though, why.

see GREEK for 3748

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅτι

Cj.

that, since, because

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅτι hoti 1x

originally was the neuter of ὅστις, that, Mt. 2:16, 22, 23; 6:5, 16; often used pleonastically in reciting another’s words, Mt. 9:18; Lk. 19:42; Acts 5:23; as a causal particle, for that, for, because, Mt. 2:18; 5:3, 4, 5; 13:13; because, seeing that, since, Lk. 23:40; Acts 1:17

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

be-kos' (hina, "in order that"): "The multitude rebuked them, because (AV; the Revised Version (British and American) "that") they should hold their peace" (Mt 20:31).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%that

that64% · 856×because19% · 252×for16% · 209×other renderings1% · 12×

1,329 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,293 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

σύ

λέγωI say, speakγάρforδέbut, on the othe

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςσύδέbut, on the othe

οἶδαI know, remember

οὐNegκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakμαθητήςa learner, disciπερί

γινώσκωI come to know, lear

οὗτοςκαίand, even, also,αὐτός

ὅτιbecause1293×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπατήρfather, Father,

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existοἶδαI know, rememberδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ἐγώ

εἰμίI am, existοὐNegὁArticle the

οὗτος

εἰμίI am, existὁArticle theποιέωI do, make

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theῥῆμαa thing spokenζητέωI seek, search f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅτι · 1,293× in the New Testament

John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 John Revelation 1 Corinthians Romans 2 Corinthians Galatians Philippians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

οἶδαI know, remember×γινώσκωI come to know, learn, realize×ἀμήνHebr×μαρτυρέωI witness, testify×δοκέωI think, seem, appear, it seems×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 8c. AD 40

Μωυσῆς δὲ καὶ φιλοσοφίας ἐπ’ αὐτὴν φθάσας ἀκρότητα καὶ χρησμοῖς τὰ πολλὰ καὶ συνεκτικώτατα τῶν τῆς φύσεως ἀναδιδαχθεὶς ἔγνω δή, ὅτι ἀναγκαιότατόν ἐστιν ἐν τοῖς οὖσι τὸ μὲν εἶναι δραστήριον αἴτιον, τὸ δὲ παθητόν, καὶ ὅτι τὸ μὲν δραστήριον ὁ τῶν ὅλων…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

C.Erbstreit14Diospolis Magna (Theben)187 BC

καὶ τὴν εἰκοστὴν τοῦ ἐγκυκλίου καὶ τὰ ἄλλα τὰ καθήκοντα. … ται Προῖτος, καθʼ ὅτι πρόκειται … ἑξήκοντα ἓξ τετρωβόλου καὶ τῆς … … τοπογραμματέως τοῦ Παθυρίτου … ἀρουρῶν

P.Grenf. 1 10 p. 24Hermonthis149 BC

ι τοῖς ἐνκαλουμένοις τὸ ἀντίγραφον τῆς ἐντεύξεως λαβεῖν παρ … τ … … πίστιν ὅτι ἀπαντησα … ἐπὶ τὸ ἐν τῆι αὐλῆι κριτήριον ἐν ἡμέραις λ οὐκ ο

P.Bour. 10Pathyris89 BC

δʼ ἐπιχειροῦντας μὴ ὑπακούειν σου … υτέραι στάσει ἐχομένους ἀσφαλισάμενος μέχρι τοῦ καὶ ἡμᾶς ὅτι τάχος ἐπιβαλεῖν πρὸς σέ. ἔρρωσοἔρρωσο ἔτους κϛ Φαμενὼθ ιϛ

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

ἐνen by G1722 Preposition ¶

2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.

Tyndale gloss

in/on/among

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

In the sense of "against" which survives only in dialectal English (compare Wright, Dialect Dict., I, 470, for examples) is the King James Version rendering of the dative emauto of 1Co 4:4 (the American Standard Revised Version renders this "against"). In classical Greek the same idiom sunoida with dative = "be conscious" or "be cognizant of" a thing.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

By

In the expression “by myself” (A.V., 1 Cor. 4:4), means, as rendered in the Revised Version, “against myself.”

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

79%in

in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg

ἐγώ

μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς

ἐνby2743×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theμένωI remain, abide

σύ

εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existὁArticle the

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μένωI remain, abide×ἱερόςa temple×συναγωγήan assembly, congregation, synagogue×μέσοςmiddle, in the middle×ἔρημοςdeserted, desolate, a desert×

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

τῇho the G3588 Article · dative · singular · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-DSF — Article · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

φαρμακείᾳpharmakeia sorcery G5331 Noun · dative · singular · feminine ¶

3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Sorcery refers to the use of magic or spells, as seen in Galatians 5:20 and Revelation 9:21, where it is considered a sinful practice.

Amplified meaning

magic, enchantments

Tyndale gloss

sorcery

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word φαρμακεία (transliterated as pharmakeia) is derived from φαρμακεύω, meaning to administer drugs. It encompasses the use of medicine, drugs, and spells, as well as concepts of poisoning and witchcraft. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts related to sorcery and magical arts, notably in Galatians and Revelation, highlighting its association with idolatry.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φαρμακία (Rec. -εία), -ας, ἡ

(< φαρμακεύω, to administer drugs)

poët. and late prose form of φαρμακεία,

[in LXX: Ex 7:11, 22 8:7, 18 (3, 14) (לָט, חַרְטֹם), Is 47:9, 12 (כֶּשֶׁף) Wi 12:4 18:13 * ;]

generally, the use of medicine, drugs or spells (Xen.).

(a) poisoning (Plut., Polyb.);

sorcery, witchcraft: Ga 5:20 (v. Lft., in l.), Re 9:21 (WH, txt., φαρμάκων) 18:23 (cf. LXX, ll. c.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

φαρμακεία [WH «ia, so T (exe. in Gal. v. 20; cf. the Proleg. p. 88); see I, ¢],-as, 9, (φαρμακεύω) ; a. the use or the administering of drugs (Xen. mem. 4, 2, 17). b. poisoning (Plat., Polyb., al.): Rev. ix. 21 [here WH txt. Tr mrg. φαρμάκων ; many interpp. refer the pass. to next head]. ce. sorcery, magical arts, often found in connection with idolatry and fostered by it: Gal. v. 20 [where see Bp. Lghtft.] (Sap. xii. 4; xviii. 18; for Ὁ 33. Is. xlvii. 9; for mn, Ex. vii. 22; viii. 18; for 007%, Ex. vii. 11); trop. of the deceptions and seductions of idolatry, Rev. xviii. 28." appaxets, -έως, 6, (φάρμακον), one who prepares or uses magical remedies; a sorcerer: Rev. xxi. 8 Rec. (Soph., Plat., Joseph., Leian., Plut., al.)

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φαρμακεία (pharmakeia) — sorcery.

φαρμᾰκ-είᾱ, ἡ,

use of drugs, especially of purgatives, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἱ ἄνω φ., i. e. emetics, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of abortifacients, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: generally, the use of any kind of drugs, potions, or spells, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. poisoning or witchcraft, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; αἱ περὶ τὰς φαρμακείας, ={αἱ φαρμακίδες}, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. metaphorically, remedy, παιδιὰς προσάγειν φαρμακείας χάριν [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

φαρμακεία

pharmakeia

from 5332; medication ("pharmacy"), i.e. (by extension) magic

(literally or figuratively):--sorcery, witchcraft.

see GREEK for 5332

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φαρμακεία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

magic, sorcery, enchantment

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

φαρμακεία φαρμα^κεία_, ἡ, φαρμακεύω the use of drugs, potions, spells, Plat.

poisoning, witchcraft, Lat. veneficium, Dem.

remedy, cure, Arist.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-DSF — Noun · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Nave's Topical Bible

→ (Divination by an alleged assistance of evil spirits)

→ Forbidden Le 19:26-28,31; 20:6; De 18:9-14

→ Denounced Isa 8:19; Mal 3:5

→ Practiced

By the Egyptians Isa 19:3,11,12

By the magicians Ex 7:11,22; 8:7,18

By Balaam Nu 22:6; 23:23; with 22; 23

By Jezebel 2Ki 9:22

By the Ninevites Na 3:4,5

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%sorcery

sorcery100% · 2×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial67%predicate33%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐκἐν

εἰδωλολατρίαworship or service o

φαρμακείαsorcery3×

what comes after →

ἔχθραenmity, hostility

ἔριςcontention, stri

αὐτός

οὔτεNeg

σύ

πλανάωI lead astray, d

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceφαρμακεία · 3× in the New Testament

Revelation Galatians

Across the New Testament2 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

οὔτεNeg×ἐκ×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

The Epistle of Barnabas

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 20.1c. AD 100

ὁδὸς γάρ ἐστιν θανάτου αἰωνίου μετὰ τιμωρίας, ἐν ᾖ ἐστιν τὰ ἀπολλύντα τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτῶν: εἰδωλολατρεία, θρασύτης, ὕψος δυνάμεως, ὑπόκρισις, διπλοκαρδία, μοιχεία, φόνος, ἁρπαγή, ὑπερηφανία, παράβασις, δόλος, κακία, αὐθάδεια, φαρμακεία, μαγεία,…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD

P.Alex. 21AD 101–AD 300

πρὸς ὑπόμνησιν τὰ φαρμάκια τὰ υ … α τὸ γάριον τὰ πρὸς τὸν ἱερόν τὰ ἀρτύματα τὰ

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

σουsu of you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · singular ¶

2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.

Tyndale gloss

you

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-2GS — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · singular
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

78%you

you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ

καίand, even, also, nam

ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg

ἐν

ὁArticle theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein

πρός

ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de

σύof you2892×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, because

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐν

ἐν

ὁArticle theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament

Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀμήνHebr×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

אַתָּ֫האָ֑תָּה pron. 2 s. m. thou H859b אתי, i.e. אתִּי, th66%H859 · 301 verses

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

ἐπλανήθησανplanaō were deceived G4105 Verb · aorist · passive · indicative · third person · plural ¶

39× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To lead someone astray or cause them to wander from the truth, as seen in Matthew 24:4-5 where Jesus warns of false prophets. This can also mean to deceive or seduce someone.

Amplified meaning

led astray, misled

Tyndale gloss

to lead astray

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πλανάω is built from the root meaning to cause to wander or stray. It covers a range of meanings including leading astray, deceiving, and going off the right path, both literally and metaphorically. The New Testament uses it in contexts of deception and error, as seen in verses like Matthew 18:12 and 1 Peter 2:25. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πλανάω, -ῶ

(< πλάνη),

[in LXX chiefly for תּעה;]

to cause to wander, lead astray. Pass., to go astray, wander: Mt 18:12, 13, He 11:38, I Pe 2:25 (cf. Is 53:6). Metaph., to lead astray, deceive: c. acc. pers., Mt 24:4, 5, 11, 24, Mk 13:5, 6, Jo 7:12, II Ti 3:13, I Jo 1:8 2:26 3:7, Re 2:20 12:9 13:14 19:20 20:3, 8, 10; pass., to be led astray, to err: Mt 22:29, Mk 12:24, 27, Lk 21:8, Jo 7:47,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πλανάω, -@; fut. πλανήσω ; 1 aor. ἐπλάνησα; Pass., pres. πλανῶμαι; pf. πεπλάνημαι; 1 aor. ἐπλανήθην ; (πλάνη); fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Sept. for APN; to cause to stray, to lead astray, lead aside from the right way ; a. prop.; in pass., Sept. chiefly for NA, fo go astray, wander, roam about, (first so in Hom. 1]. 23, 321): Mt. xviii. 12sq-; 1 Pet. ii. 25 (fr. Is. liii. 6, cf. Ex. xxiii. 4 ; Ps. exviii. (exix.) 176); Heb. xi. 38. b. metaph. to lead away from the truth, to lead into error, to deceive: twa, Mt. xxiv. 4, 5, 11, 24; Mk. xiii. 5,6; Jn. vii. 12; 1Jn. ii. 26; iii. 7; 2 Tim. iii. 13"; Rev. ii. 20GLT TrWH; xii. 93 xiii. 14; xix. 20; xx. 8, 8, 10; ἑαυτόν, 1 Jn. 1. 8; pass. to be led into error, [R.V. be led astray]: Lk. xxi. 8; Jn. vii. 47; Rev. ii. 20 Rec.; to err, Mt. xxii. 29; ΜΚ. xii. 24, 27; μὴ πλανᾶσθε, 1 Co. vi. 9; xv. 33; Gal. vi. 7; Jas. 1. 16; esp. through ignorance…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πλανάω. For the metaph. use of πλανάω, ‘lead astray,” ‘‘deceive,” cf. P Par 4728 (B.c. 152-1) (= ΡΖ i. p. 332,

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πλανάω (planaō) — to lead astray.

πλᾰν-άω,

future -ήσω [LXX]:—passive and middle, future -ήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐπλανήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect πεπλάνημαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: (πλάνη):—Prose verb, ={πλάζω} (used once in [Refs 8th c.BC+], cause to wander, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. lead from the subject, in talking, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

3. lead astray, mislead, deceive, ἢ γνώμη πλαν; [NT+5th c.BC+]; πλανῶν τὴν ἔξοδον, of the Labyrinth, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. passive, wander, stray, ἵπποι πλανόωνται ἀνὰ δρόμον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the planets, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of reports, travel abroad, πολλὰ.. ἐμπόρων ἔπη φιλεῖ π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πλανάω

planao

from 4106; to (properly, cause to) roam (from safety, truth, or

virtue):--go astray, deceive, err, seduce, wander, be out of the way.

see GREEK for 4106

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πλανάω

v.

I lead astray, deceive

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πλανάω planaō 39x

to lead astray, cause to wander; pass. to go astray, wander about, stray, Mt. 18:12, 13; 1 Pet. 2:25; met. to mislead, deceive, Mt. 24:4, 5, 11, 24; pass. to be deceived, err, mistake, Mt. 22:29; to seduce, delude, Jn. 7:12; pass. to be seduced or wander from the path of virtue, to sin, transgress, Tit. 3:3; Heb. 5:2; Jas. 5:19

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πλανάω πλάνη like πλάζω, to make to wander, lead wandering about, Hdt., Aesch.:— to lead from the subject, in talking, Dem.

to lead astray, mislead, deceive, Soph., Plat.

Pass. to wander, roam about, stray, Il., Aesch.; c. acc. loci, to wander over, Lat. oberrare, Eur.; but c. acc. cogn., πολλοὺς ἑλιγμοὺς πλανᾶσθαι to wander about as in a labyrinth, Xen.:— of reports, to wander abroad, Soph.

to wander in speaking, digress, Hdt.

c. gen., πλαναθεὶς καιροῦ having missed one's opportunity, Pind.

to do a thing irregularly or at random, Hdt.; ἐνύπνια τὰ ἐς ἀνθρώπους πεπλανημένα that have visited them irregularly, id. Hdt.

to wander in mind, to be at a loss, id. Hdt., Aesch.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-API-3P — Verb · aorist · passive · indicative · third person · plural
aorist passive indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-API-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

10%deceiving

deceiving10% · 4×do be misled8% · 3×they will mislead8% · 3×being deceived5% · 2×you err5% · 2×may mislead5% · 2×do be deceived3% · 1×they go astray3% · 1×other renderings55% · 22×

40 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 30 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb95%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 39 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

μήNeg

ὁArticle theβλέπωI look, seeκληρονομέωI inherit, obtai

καίand, even, also, nam

πρόβατονa sheepἐγείρωI wake, arouse, πλανάωI lead astray, d

σύ

τὶςκαίand, even, also,ἐν

ὁArticle the

ζητέωI seek, search fπερίΣατανᾶςan adversary, Sa

πολύςmuch, many, often

καίand, even, also,ζάωI live

πλανάωwere deceived39×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ὄχλοςa crowdκαρδίαthe heart, innerἐμός

καίand, even, also, nam

πλανάωI lead astray, dὄροςa mountainὁArticle the

μήNeg

οἶδαI know, remember

πολύςmuch, many, often

γάρfor

σύ

ὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπλανάω · 39× in the New Testament

Matthew Revelation Mark 1 John Hebrews 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy James John 1 Peter 2 Peter Galatians

Across the New Testament14 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

μήNeg×πολύςmuch, many, often×ἔθνοςa race, people, the Gentiles×πρόβατονa sheep×οὔτεNeg×χείρωνworse×πλανάωI lead astray, deceive×ἀλήθειαtruth×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

תָּעָהerr45%H8582 · 32 verses

Counted over the 71 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Josephus The Didache The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.108c. AD 40

„ἐπικατάρατος μέντοι καὶ ὁ πλανῶν τυφλὸν ἐν ὁδῷ“ (Deut.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 4.274c. AD 75–95

ὁμοίως καὶ περὶ βοσκημάτων οἷς ἂν ἐντύχῃ τις κατʼ ἐρημίαν πλανωμένοις, μὴ εὑρεθέντος τοῦ κυρίου παραχρῆμα παρʼ αὑτῷ φυλαττέτω μαρτυράμενος τὸν θεὸν μὴ νοσφίζεσθαι ἀλλότρια.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 16.1c. AD 100

Ἔτι δὲ καὶ περὶ τοῦ ναοῦ ἐρῶ ὑμῖν, ὡς πλανώμενοι οἱ ταλαίπωροι εἰς τὴν οἰκοδομὴν ἤλπισαν, καὶ οὐκ ἐπὶ τὸν θεὸν αὐτῶν τὸν ποιήσαντα αὐτούς, ὡς ὄντα οἶκον θεοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD

P.Paris p. 315-316 no. 47Memphis153 BC

με πώποτε ἐν τῇ Τρικομίαι ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης, εἰ καὶ αὑτοὺς δεδώκαμεν καὶ ἀποπεπτώκαμεν πλανώμενοι ὑπὸ τῶν θεῶν καὶ πιστεύοντες τὰ ἐνύπνια. εὐτύχει.

P.Oxy. 36 2754OxyrhynchosAD 111

χρηματικὴν πείσονται ζημίαν, τὸν τοῦ θεῶν ἐμφανεστάτου Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Νέρουα Τραιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Δακικοῦ πλανῶντες ἔλεον. οὐδεμίαν οἱ τοῖς βιβλίοις ἐμφερόμενοι παραίτησιν ἕξουσιν ὑπερτίθεσθαι βουλόμενοι, πάλαι τοῦ…

ZPE 205 (2018), p. 127-142Fundort: Kellis (Oasis MagnaAD 301–AD 400

ς· καὶ οὐδὲν αὐτῶν ἠνέχθη μοι εἰς πρόσωπον οὐχ … ε ἢ διὰ τῶν πλανώντων. τοῦτο δὲ μάλιστα … κ … σμου … ει ἐν οἷς καὶ ὤφειλεν τὴν

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

πάνταpas all G3956 Adjective · nominative · plural · neuter ¶

1,242× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means all or every, as in Matthew 3:10 and Romans 7:8, where it refers to everything or all people, emphasizing the universal nature of God's message.

Tyndale gloss

all

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πᾶς (i.e., *pas*) means 'all' or 'every' and appears in various forms, including masculine, feminine, and neuter. It is used in the New Testament to denote totality, as in 'all things' or 'every kind,' and can function as an adjective or pronoun. Notably, it can also imply 'the whole' when used with definite articles, as seen in verses like Matthew 28:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, gen., παντός, πάσης, παντός,

[in LXX chiefly for כֹּל;]

all, every.

As adj.,

c. subst. anarth., all, every, of every kind: Mt 3:10 4:23, Mk 9:49, Lk 4:37, Jo 2:10, Ac 27:20, Ro 7:8, Re 18:17, al. mult.; pl., all, Ac 22:15, Ro 5:12, He 1:6, al.; of the highest degree, π. ἐξουσία (προθυμία, χαρά), Mt 28:18,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, en. παντός, πάσης, παντός, [dat. plur. Lchm. πᾶσι ten times, -σιν seventy-two times; Tdf. -σι five times (see Proleg. p. 98 sq.), -ow seventy-seven times; Treg. -ow eighty-two times; WH -ox fourteen times, -ow sixty-eight times; see N, v (ἐφελκυστικόν)], Hebr. 75, [fr. Hom. down], all, every; it is used I. adjectively, and 1. with anarthrous nouns; a. any, every one (86. of the class denoted by the noun annexed to mas); with the Singular: as πᾶν δένδρον, Mt. iii. 10; πᾶσα θυσία, Mk. ix. 49 [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.]; add, Mt. v.11; xv. 13; Lk. iv. 37; Jn.ii. 10; xv.2; Acts ii.43; v.42; Ro. xiv. 11; 1 Co. iv. 17; Rev. xviii. 17, and very often; πᾶσα ψυχὴ ἀνθρώπου, Ro. ii. 9 (πᾶσα ἀνθρ. ψυχή, Plat. Phaedr. p- 249e.); πᾶσα συνείδησις ἀνθρώπων, 2 Co. iv. 2; mas λεγόμενος θεός, 2 Th. ii. 4; πᾶς ἅγιος ἐν Χριστῷ, Phil. iv. 21sqq. with the Plural, all or any that are…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παῖς. In Gnomon 41 (¢. A.D. 150) it is laid down—éav Αἰγύπτιος ἐκ κοπρίας [ἀν]έληται παῖδα καὶ τοῦτον υἱοποιήσηται, μετὰ θάνατον τεταρτολο[ γεῖτ]αι, ““1Γ an Egyptian shall take up a child from the dungheap, and adopt him as a son, he shall be mulcted after his death to the extent of one fourth of his property.” For παῖς applied to a female child see P Strass I. 41° (A.D. 250) ἐκδικῆσαι τὰ τῆς παιδός, and P Oxy 1 5215 (A.D. 325) εΠδαμὲν τὴν παῖδα ἔχουσαν κατὰ τῶν εἰσχίων ἀμυχὰς μετὰ πελιωμάτων (see 76. II. p. 319), ““νγῈ saw that the girl had wounds on her hips with livid spots”: cf. Lk 8° (for voc. of address see Pro/eg. pp. 70, 235). The word is commonly applied to slaves, as in Lk 77 a/., e.g. P Lille 27 (iii/B.c.), where 11 male slaves are enumerated under the heading παῖδες, then 2 female slaves, and then again 3 male slaves: cf. P Strass I. 405 (a. p. 569) Κολλοῦθος Βίκτορος…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πᾶς (pas) — all.

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν,

__AAeolic dialect παῖς, παῖσα [Refs 7th c.BC+] feminine πάνσα [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Delph. πάντεσσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also Locrian dialect πάντεσιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάντοις [Refs 2nd c.BC+] as accusative masculine in [LXX+7th c.BC+], etc. (but in compounds sometimes long in Attic dialect, [Refs].]—Coll. pronoun, when used of a number, all; when of one only, the whole; of the several persons in a number, every.

__A.I in plural, all, πάντες τε θεοὶ πᾶσαί τε θέαιναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάντες ὅσοι.. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάντας ᾧ ἂνπεριτυγχάνῃ, for ὅσοις ἄν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with the Article, see.below [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πᾶς

pas

including all the forms of declension; apparently a primary word; all,

any, every, the whole:--all (manner of, means), alway(-s), any (one),

X daily, + ever, every (one, way), as many as, + no(-thing), X

thoroughly, whatsoever, whole, whosoever.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν

Adj

all, the whole, every kind of

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πᾶς pas 1x

all; in the sg. the whole, entire, usually when the substantive has the article, Mt. 6:29; 8:32; Acts 19:26; every, only with an anarthrous subst., Mt. 3:10; 4:4; pl. all, Mt. 1:17, et al. freq.; πάντα, in all respects, Acts 20:35; 1 Cor. 9:25; 10:33; 11:2; by a Hebraism, a negative with πᾶς is sometimes equivalent to οὐδείς or μηδείς, Mt. 24:22; Lk. 1:37; Acts 10:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Adj-NPN — Adjective · nominative · plural · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NPN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ol: Used in various combinations, and with different meanings.

(1) All along, "Weeping all along as he went" (Jer 41:6), i.e. throughout the whole way he went, feigning equal concern with the men from Shiloh, etc., for the destruction of the Temple, so as to put them off their guard.

(2) All in all, "That God may be all in all" (1Co 15:28, Greek: panta en pasin, "all things in all (persons and) things"). "The universe, with all it comprises, will wholly answer to God's will and reflect His mind" (Dummelow).

(3) All one, "It is all one" (Job 9:22), "it makes no difference whether I live or die."

(4) At all, "If thy father miss me at all" (1Sa 20:6), "in any way," "in the least."

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

62%all

all62% · 789×all things12% · 156×every12% · 150×everyone6% · 76×everything3% · 34×other renderings3% · 40×other renderings2% · 19×

1,264 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 28 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject40%adverbial30%object21%predicate5%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,242 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύλόγοςa word, speech,

ἐν

καίand, even, also,ἀλλάbut, exceptἐγώ

ὁArticle the

αὐτόςὅςὁArticle the

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδείκνυμιI point out, shoπροσφέρωI bring to, offe

ἐπί

καίand, even, also,ἐγώεἰμίI am, exist

πᾶςall1242×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἔθνοςa race, people, λαόςa people, the crπιστεύωI believe, have

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theχορτάζωI feed, satisfyδιά

σύ

εἰμίI am, existἐνκαίand, even, also,

γάρfor

ὁArticle theσύοὗτος

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theοὗτοςὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπᾶς · 1,242× in the New Testament

Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians Romans Mark John Revelation Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians Colossians

27 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ὑποτάσσωI place under, subject to×κατοικέωI dwell in, settle in, inhabit×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 10c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ πατὴρ ἐκγόνων καὶ δημιουργὸς τῶν δημιουργηθέντων στοχάζεται τῆς διαμονῆς καὶ ὅσα μὲν ἐπιζήμια καὶ βλαβερὰ μηχανῇ πάσῃ διωθεῖται, τὰ δὲ ὅσα ὠφέλιμα καὶ λυσιτελῆ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον ἐκπορίζειν ἐπιποθεῖ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς οἱ Νώχου ἔγγονοι πᾶσαν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐπῴκησαν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.4c. AD 100

πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντων πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

τὰho the G3588 Article · nominative · plural · neuter ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NPN — Article · nominative · plural · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And [the] light of lamp certainly not may shine in you any longer, and [the] voice of a bridegroom and a bride certainly not may be heard in you any longer, for the merchants of you were the great ones of the earth, because by the sorcery of you were deceived all the nations.”

ἔθνη.ethnos nations. G1484 Noun · nominative · plural · neuter ¶

162× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means a nation or people, often referring to non-Jewish people. In Matthew 21:43 and Acts 10:35, it describes the Gentiles or nations.

Amplified meaning

Gentiles, peoples

Tyndale gloss

Gentiles

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔθνος (i.e., *ethnos*) refers to a multitude or a nation, often distinguished from the Jewish people. It can denote a company of individuals or animals and is frequently used in the New Testament to refer to Gentiles or non-Jews. The term appears in various contexts, including Acts and Matthew, where it highlights the distinction between Jews and other nations.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔθνος, -ους, τό,

[in LXX chiefly for עַם ,גּוֹי ;]

a multitude, a company, whether of beasts or men (Hom.).

a nation, people: Mt 21:43 24:7, Mk 13:8, Lk 22:25, Ac 10:35, al.; in sing., of the Jewish people, Lk 7:5 23:2, Jo 11:48, 50-53 18:35, Ac 10:22 24:3, 10 26:4 28:19.

In pl., as in OT, τὰ ἔ. (like Heb. הַגּוֹיִם), the nations, as distinct from Israel, Gentiles: Mt 4:15 6:32, Ac 26:17, Ro…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔθνος, -ους, τό; 1. a multitude (whether of men or of beasts) associated or living together ; a company, troop, swarm: ἔθνος ἑταίρων, ἔθνος ᾿Αχαιῶν, ἔθνος λαῶν, Hom. 1]. ; ἔθνος μελισσάων, 2,87; μυιάων ἔθνεα, ib. 469. 2. α multitude of individuals of the same nature or genus, (τὸ ἔθνος τὸ θῆλυ ἢ τὸ ἄρρεν, Xen. oec. 7, 26): πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων, the human race, Acts xvii. 26 [but this seems to belong under the next head]. 3. race, nation: Mt. xxi. 43; Acts x. 35, ete.; ἔθνος ἐπὶ ἔθνος, Mt. xxiv. 7; ΜΚ. xiii. 8; οἱ ἄρχοντες, of βασιλεῖς τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mt. xx. 25; Lk. xxii. 25; used [in the sing.] of the Jewish people, Lk. vii. δ; xxiii. 2; Jn. xi. 48, 50-53; xviii. 35; Acts x. 22; xxiv. 2 (3), 10; xxvi. 4; xxviii. 19. 4. (ra) ἔθνη, like 0127 in the O. T., foreign nations not worshipping the true God, pagans, Gentiles, [ οἴ. Trench § xeviii.]: Mt. iv. 15 (Γαλιλαία τῶν ἐθνῶν), vi. 32; [3 Jn. 7…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔθνος. Hicks in CR i. p. 42f. has shown that ‘‘ Hellenic life found its normal type in the πόλις, and barbarians who lived κατὰ κώμας or in some less organised form were ἔθνη,᾽᾿ and that similarly in the LXX and NT ἔθνος ‘‘ describes the pagan world, outside the Jewish Church,’’ but occasionally stands for the λαός itself, as in Ac 107%, 2477 α΄. In an Impenial rescript of a.p. 198-201 we have a good example of the word = ‘‘ province’ —P Oxy VII. 1020° ᾧ ἡγούplevos] τοῦ ἔθνους τὸν ἀγῶνα τῆς ἀφέσεως ἐκδικ[ήσει, “the praefect of the province shall decide the suit for release” (Ed.): cf. P Strass I. 2219 (iii/A.p.) διατάξεις εἰσὶν τῶν κυρίων περὶ τῶν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν οἰκούντων, where the editor understands by ἔθνη, ‘“‘provinctae populé Romani,” and the exx. from Greek writers of this usage in Magie p. 59, dA7chzv i. p. 66: see also Deissmann Pax/, p. 100. In the edict regarding the aurum…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔθνος (ethnos) — Gentiles.

ἔθνος, εος, τό:

(ϝέθνος,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: - number of people living together, company, body of men, ἑτάρων ἔ., ἔ. ἑταίρων, band of comrades, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔθνος λαῶν host of men, [Refs]; of particular tribes, Αυκίων μέγα ἔ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of animals, ἔ. μελισσάων, ὀρνίθων, μυιάων, swarms, flocks, etc., [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἀνέρων, γυναικῶν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. βρότεον, θνατόν, [Refs]; ἔ. τόδε, of the Erinyes, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. after [Refs 8th c.BC+], nation, people, τὸ Μηδικὸν ἔ. (γένος being a subdivision of ἔθνος) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἠπειρογενές, μαχαιροφόρον, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔθνος

ethnos

probably from 1486; a race (as of the same habit), i.e. a tribe;

specially, a foreign (non-Jewish) one (usually, by implication,

pagan):--Gentile, heathen, nation, people.

see GREEK for 1486

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔθνος, ους, τό

n.n.

a race, people, the Gentiles

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔθνος ethnos 162x

a multitude, company, Acts 17:26; 1 Pet. 2:9; Rev. 21:24; a nation, people, Mt. 20:25; 21:43; pl. ἔθνη, from the Hebrew, nations or people as distinguished from the Jews, the heathen, Gentiles, Mt. 4:15; 10:5; Lk. 2:32

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔθνος ἔθνος, εος, ἔθω a number of people accustomed to live together, a company, body of men, Il., etc.; ἔθνος λαῶν a host of men, id. Il.; also of animals, swarms, flocks, id. Il., Soph.

after Hom., a nation, people, Hdt., etc.:—in NTest. τὰ ἔθνη the nations, Gentiles, i. e. all but Jews and Christians.

a special class of men, a caste, tribe, Plat., Xen.

sex, id. Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NPN — Noun · nominative · plural · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NPN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

na'-shunz.

See GENTILES; GOIIM; HEATHEN; TABLE OF NATIONS.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

55%gentiles

gentiles55% · 91×nations20% · 33×nation18% · 30×other renderings4% · 6×other renderings2% · 4×

164 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial36%subject27%object15%indirect object11%predicate9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 162 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

πᾶςall, the whole, καίand, even, also,ἐν

καίand, even, also, nam

λαόςa people, the crγλῶσσαthe tongue, a laοὐχίIrg

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ἀπόἐνεἷςone

ἐκ

λαμβάνωI receive, takeὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,

ἐπί

ἔθνοςa race, people,

ἔθνοςnations.162×

what comes after →

καίand, even, also, nam

βασιλείαkingship, sovereὁArticle theλαόςa people, the cr

ὁArticle the

μήNegθεόςGod, a godκόσμοςthe world, unive

ἐπί

ἔθνοςa race, people, ὅςὅσος

ἐγώ

καίand, even, also,ἐπιστέλλωI write, send byπαραγίνομαιI appear, come,

εἰς

ὁArticle theὅςαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔθνος · 162× in the New Testament

Acts Romans Revelation Matthew Luke Galatians Mark Ephesians John 1 Corinthians 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἔθνοςa race, people, the Gentiles×λαόςa people, the crowd×ὑπέρ×παραδίδωμιI hand over, deliver, betray×βασιλεύςa king, ruler, emperor×γλῶσσαthe tongue, a language, nation×κηρύσσωI proclaim, herald, preach×φῶςlight, a source of light×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

גּוֹיnation, people H1471b גּוֹיִם n. pr. gent. Tid‛al ki62%H1471 · 318 verses

Counted over the 509 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.88c. AD 40

ἐπειδὴ γὰρ πορεύεται ἡ ὑπομονητικὴ ψυχὴ Ῥεβέκκα πυθέσθαι παρὰ θεοῦ, ἀποκρίνεται αὐτῇ, ὅτι „δύο ἔθνη ἐν τῇ γαστρί σού ἐστι, καὶ δύο λαοὶ ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας σου διασταλήσονται, καὶ λαὸς λαοῦ ὑπερέξει, καὶ ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 9.5c. AD 100

λάβε πάλιν: Ἰδού, λέγει κύριος, πάντα τὰ ἔθνη ἀπερίτμητα ἀκροβυστίαν, ὁ δὲ λαὸς οὗτος ἀπερίτμητος καρδίας.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Diog. 23AD 185–AD 186

ὁ κύριος ἡμῶν … τοῦτο τὸ ἔθνος … λομενον πυ … εισθαι πρ … … ἐντολῆς … … εἰδῶσι ἔτους κϛ

P.Sijp. 58AD 101–AD 300

ἀδελφῇ … χαίρειν. … μικρὸν παιδίον … ς φοινίκων … αν αὐτὸν ὡς … ἔθνη κoινὰν … μηχανῶν ἢ ἐρι… ἐπεὶ γὰρ χρείαν σου ἔχω … ἀσπάσασθαι. ἀπο

P.Col. 6 123Tebtynis? (Arsinoites)AD 200

ἀπολαβεῖν σε τὴν νομὴν τῶν χωρὶς συνβάσεως κατεχομένων πρὸς βίαν χωρίων ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ ἔθνους κελεύσει … … θαλγη Ἀμβρήλου διὰ Ἀβδομάνχου υἱοῦ. ἀργύριον γυναῖκες δανίζεσθαι καὶ ὑπὲρ ἄλλων

BSB	The light of a lamp will never shine in you again, and the voices of a bride and bridegroom will never call out in you again. For your merchants were the great ones of the earth, because all the nations were deceived by your sorcery.”
KJV	And the light of a candle shall shine no more at all in thee; and the voice of the bridegroom and of the bride shall be heard no more at all in thee: for thy merchants were the great men of the earth; for by thy sorceries were all nations deceived.
ASV	and the light of a lamp shall shine no more at all in thee; and the voice of the bridegroom and of the bride shall be heard no more at all in thee: for thy merchants were the princes of the earth; for with thy sorcery were all the nations deceived.
YLT	and light of a lamp may not shine at all in thee any more; and voice of bridegroom and of bride may not be heard at all in thee any more; because thy merchants were the great ones of the earth, because in thy sorcery were all the nations led astray,
WEB	The light of a lamp will shine no more at all in you. The voice of the bridegroom and of the bride will be heard no more at all in you, for your merchants were the princes of the earth; for with your sorcery all the nations were deceived.
BBE	And never again will the shining of lights be seen in you; and the voice of the newly-married man and the bride will never again be sounding in you: for your traders were the lords of the earth, and by your evil powers were all the nations turned out of the right way.

Revelation 18:23 — Word Study

Cite / Share This Page

Deep Study — Revelation 18:23

Context — The Fall of Babylongenerated

Cross References

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 18 references, hung on the phrase they belong to

Nave’s Topical Bible — the subjects this verse is filed under

The Key Word — φαρμακείᾳ, pharmakeiagenerated

How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

Sentence Structuregenerated

Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

Reflection Questionsgenerated

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Modern formal

Tyndale line

Strictly literal

From the Latin

Simplified

Word by word, the decisions they made

The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Word by word, across the editions

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

Lexicons — every word in Revelation 18:23

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before